त्रः
` GOVERNMENT OF INDIA DEPARTMENT OF ARCHAEOLOGY
CENTRAL ARCHAEOLOGICAL LIBRARY
णी
Gaui No. JPx4 cl | p Y 4 । | ua. Hoe __ ot
D.G.A. 79,
-------~-~------~~-- -- -------~---~- - --- ~
_ +.
THE
~~ PRAKRITA-LAKSHANAM
“OR
CHANDA’S GRAMMAR : es + zs 2 Oe. os: । ` भ
ANCIENT (ARSHA) PRAKRIT
1 ny ५. र ¦ क SOR RM ण) py 3 ae 7 ERNLE. SOM A. F. RUDOLF HOERNLE, °«.
PH, D, TUBINGEN, cease
FELLOW OF THE CALCUTTA UNIVERSITY, HONORARY PHILOLOGICAL SECRETARY TO THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL, ETC.
Part I.
TEXT WITH A CRITICAL INTRODUCTION ^
(वण ; THOMAS, BAPTIST MISSION PRESS, D BY THE ASIATIC SOUIErY,
57, PARK STREET
1:26.
PRINTED BY J. RUB
CENTRAL AR CH ee A 06166 ४ ०० No, ra | Bea ०५५७७४५ ८ ४ 7. 828 BO Deng
Ry mr
५५ ie ' "४ | ५
न वव न ~ न =
व.
See es eee : वे ५.5 Se a a
os
“4 as
=
ee abet
if 14
i 1 1 4 u । ५ a
Fag < By.
TO
SIR WILLIAM MUIR, K. € 9, ^
ALO, ETO.
WHO HAS DONE SO MUCH FOR THE STUDY OF THE LANGUAGES OF INDIA
स AVE
a
De ye Sa य _ Stas तः See tad ae 4 ot eee Sa ene a ae oe ae gn, S JF s a, gis . a ae = त अ 7 Fal se ष x a त धैः ~ ˆ „> =P द 7 oe च ~ ः कि । ~
= 2 ae Y 8.
> ake
Fe oP 3g ^
THIS WORK
LIS DEDICATED
AS A TOKEN OF SINCERH RESPECT AND GRATITUDE.
«
4g
PREFACE < ---9---
In the Introductory remarks, I shall fully explain the veasons of tho arrangement observed in the following edition. In tho main portion of it, [ have adopted the text of the MSS. A and B, giving as a rule, in case of ४ difference, the preference to the reading of A. All the additional matter in the toxt of the MSS. C and D, as well as what is peculiar to any one or several MSS., has been distributed in the Appendices. This arrangement Tam aware, has its drawbacks ; but on the whole I have thought it the best possible in the peculiar circumstances of the case
The footnotes immediately under the text contain extracts from the mar- ginal gloss of MS. ©, as also the few marginal remarks that occur in MS. B. Below these again are given, at the foot of each page, the various readings of the four MSS. Undoubted clerical errors have been omitted. ‘With the exception of these, every difference has been noted ; in doubtful cases, I hava even admitted what to me seemed a mere clerical error. Considering tho important character of Chanda’s work and the state of the materials at my command, if seemed to me particularly desirable to place tho reader in posses. sion of the fullest information to form his own judgment on points that may be disputable.
The two indexes of stitras and Prdkrit words which have been added to this edition need no defence or explanation. The value of these aids has been long since recognized
The whole work is contemplated to consist of two parts. The second part, containing an English translation and annotations, is nearly ready for the press and will shortly appear
There only remains to me the pleasing duty of acknowledging the kind- ness of Dr. Rajendra Lala Mitra Rai Bahédur and Pandit Rama Misra Sdstri _ in so readily placing at my service their MSS. of Chanda’s Grammar, and the liberality of the Asiatic Society of Bengal in providing the necessary funds for the publication of this work
A. F. R.-H.
: ‘Onloutta, October 1880.
pana
INTRODUCTION.
\ ^ + OEY mre
¢, ग । The Prékrit Grammar the text of which is given in the following pages
` professes to be the work of Chanda. About his person and the time when he . lived nothing, so far as I am aware, is known beyond what can be gathered
from the work itself. From the mention of Vira or Mabdvira, the great apostle of the Jain religion, in the introductory verse, and from the fact that the Gram-
mar treats of an ancient form of what is now commonly called the Jaina ~ ` Prdkrit, it may perhaps be permissible to conclude that he belonged to the Jain ` `
community.* That he must have lived in very early times, probably not later than the beginning of our era, would appear from the archaic character of the language which he describes; assuming, of course, that he was con- temporary with that language
The Grammar bears the name of Prdkrita-Lakshana. It is a curious cit- `
cumstance, that a grammar, bearing the same name, is ascribed by two old
writers, Kedéra Bhatta and Malayagiri, to Panini, the famous Sanskrit Gram, ., ५
, -moarian, The remark of the former, as quoted by d’Alwis in his Introduction ^ , to Kachchayana’s Grammar (p. xxv), is the following: pduinibhagavdn prd~ - : । ( - 4514400 api vakti samskritdd anyat, “ Urghdksharam cha kutrachid . “
_ |. ekdm mitrdém upaite” iti ; i. ट.) “the blessed Panini also enunciates a Prékrip . ¦ :
~"; ` "पणन ‘different from Sanskrit, viz., that along vowel becomes शक्र (ण्य ` _ es * pare with this Chanda’s rule in stitra II, 8. The passage, however, does nop “` + ~ necessarily imply that Panini was the author of a Prékrit grammar of that .
name. Thelanguage of Malayagiri, as quoted by Weber, in his Indische Studien,
vol. X, p. 277, and Indische Streifen, vol. II, ए. 325, is much more explicit. . । थ: न Tt occurs in his commentary to the well-known Jaina work, the Stryaprajfiap, , -:
* Tt is not impossible, however, that the introductory verse is to be ascribed to the” | 1 2 Revisionists, fo whom most of the other Jaina indications are due ; ¢. g., the invocation of _ oa vou, ithe Biddhes at the beginning of tho work, and the same in stitra I, 6. The mere fact of a ; ५ . Chanda treating of an old form of Prékvit, which was afterwards modified by the Jainas, | “^ does णवत prove any connection of Chanda with the latter ce
; † 868 also Pischel Dissertatio inauguralis, p. 4. According to Weber, Indische Streifon - i , TL, ए. 828, ie appears to be some doubt as to the duthenticity of the quotation, | “a
1 । INTRODUCTION.
aud is as follows: “ chattdri” itt cha sttre napumsakatvanirdesah prakpita- tudt ; prékrite hi lingam yyabhichdri, yad cha pdninih svaprikytalakshane, lingam vyabhichdry api” iti ; 2. ¢., “as to the form ‘chattdri’ occurring in the stitra, the use of the neuter is accountable by its being Prakvit; for in Prakrit the gender is changeable, as Panini has said in his (work called) Pra- kritalakshana: ‘ the gender is changeable also.’ * Comparo with this Chanda’s - a rule in shtra I, 4. If our Prakyitalakshana is the work referred to by those, two writers, neither of their references are strictly quotations. The passage of ‘Keddra Bhatta, indeed, Ido not think, exactly professes to givo a quotation, but rather a paraphrase of the rule which was in his mind. Malayagiri’s language certainly seems to imply that he quotes a rule. Among all Prdkrit ` grammars, known at present, there is none which contains such arule. The nearest approach to it ig the rule in Hemachandra IV, 445 and Trivikrama III, 4, 69, dingam atantram, with its commentary: apabhramse lingam atan- tram vyabhichdri prdyo bhavati. Tt seems very probable, that Malayaviri misquotes Hemachandra’s rule and somehow or other confases the Prékrita- Lakshana with Hemachandra’s work. It may be observed, that to quote the
: » exact rule of the Prakritalakshana, kvachid vyatyayah, would hardly havo
-_Buited him, as without an explanation it would not have been intelligible, । whereas Hemachandra’s rule is so. A confusion of Chanda’s and Hemachandra’s
् ” ` `, ‘works will perhaps not appear so unnatural, when it is remembered (as I shall , /* . show in the sequel), that in all probability Chanda’s work was,.as it were, the
। --- ध । “noted
me round which Hemachandra built up his own work. It should also be | at while Hemachandra’s rule is limited to the Apabhramga, Malayagiri “understands his rule to apply to Prékrit generally. Now Chanda’s rule docs `
oo apply to Prékrit generally. The fact, that both Kedéra Bhatta and Malaya-
- girl ascribe the Prékyita-Lakshana to Panini; is, of course, of no weight. It
१ 3 merely shows that they had only a traditional acquaintance with the work. ' «+ “Still ite traditional ascription to P4nini is in so far important, as it shows that
the grammar was considered to be ancient and authoyitative. This character -- well agrees with Chanda’s Prékritalakshana. There 38 another curious cir-
_ Cumstance in Malayagiri’s Commentary, which I may mention here, as it ., seems to bear on the question under notice. Weber (in his Indisehe Studien, ,. ‘yol. X, p. 278) quotes another remark of that writer: bahuvachanam prakri-
oo : tatudd, whtam cha “ bahwayane (Cyanena ?) duvayanam” iti ; 4. e.,“ (the use of) ‘72% the plural is (accountable) by Prékrit usage, for it is said that ‘the dual । 4 । : (is to be expressed) by the plural.’ °? Compare with this Chanda’s rule in stitra ee \ ‘' TI, 12, with its commentary.* But the curious fact is that in the marginal
* Hemachandra has a similar rile in IIT, 130, but his grammatical terminology is. ^
: " different (dvivachanasya bahwoachanam) and seems to havo been मम प्रिर एषापि ; श, 63 ९ ।
gee
INTRODUCTION. VU
gloss of MS. C, specimens of which are appended to the text in this edition, that sitra of Chanda is always quoted in nearly the same Prdkrit translitera-
tion as in Malayagiri, though all other sutras are cited by the gloss in their Sanskrit form. See, & g., the footnote to sakkisénd in II, 1., and the footnote to duttvam in II, 12, I suppose it can hardly be doubtful, but that the writer of the marginal ‘gloss really moant Chanda’s sitra by his Prakeit
“quotation ; and if so, the same Prdkrit quotation in Malayugiri must tefer to
she same sitra (of Chanda). Perhaps the fuct shows that Chanda’s Gram-
mar was -originally', written in, Pra&krit, and in later times translated into
Sanskrit, as it has happened to so many other Jaina Prakrit works; but that a few of his stitras traditionally maintained themselves in their old Prakrit form, and were preferentially quoted in that form. Still after all has buen said, the evidence remains of a very slender kind. Perhaps all that ean
` ४ safely asserted is, that it is not impossible, that those two writers were speaking of Chanda’s Prékrita Lakshana.
In preparing the following edition I have had the assistance of four MSS. which I have distinguished as A, B, C and D respectively
MSS. A and B are the property of Dr. Rajendraldla Mitra of Calcutta, who very kindly ‘placed than at my. service, They are mentioned by Dr
‘Mitra on p. xix, of the Appendix to Vol. III, Part II, No, LX, of his Notices
of Sanskrit MSS. (Calcutta, 1875). They were by him supposed to be only one MS.; but on coming into my hands, I was very agreeably surprised to dis-
we cover that they really were two distinct and (as a glance at the variac lectiones and appendices will at once show) independent MSS. of the samo work. Both | aré quite modern copies (bearing date 1875, Samvat 1931). Of tho originals, `
I regret, I have not been able to obtain a sight. Dr. Mitra informs me that they were in the possession of a Pandit in Lucknow, who has since died s but . that he has not seen them himself. It-would have been of great importance to have been able to consult the originals. The copies are clearly written, but
they abound in errors.. Some of: these are mere clerical errors which offer no
” difficulty ; others again appear to be merely the peculiarities of Jain ortho. ` grapby, somewhat exaggerated by being translated into the ordinary Négarf
characters of the North West Provinces. I shall explain these peculiarities
-" further on, Both MSS. A-and B are complete, written on paper and consisting
of nine small oblong leaves, with nine lines to the page MS. C is a very excellent MS., beautifully, carefully and almost faultless. ly written. It is on paper and consists of thirteen leaves, with nine lines to
the page. It was lent tome by my friend, Pandit Rama Misra Sdstri, Assis.
tant Professor of Philosophy in the Sanskrit College at Benares, 1 belongs
to one of hig students, a Jain by religion, and a native of Kodayé in Kachehh CW. India). “Lt was copied by the latter for his own use, which accounts for its
५ BY ° INTRODUCTION.
‘excellent execution. It is said to have been copied from a very old MS., 400 years old; with how much of truth, I am unable to say, my efforts to obtain it being baffled by the usual plea of its owner having died. The MS, is com- plete ; and has the peculiarity of being supplied with a very copious marginal gloss, written in very close lines and extremely small letters on the margin _ and, here and there, between the lines of the text. ‘This gloss, however, ae + extends as far as the 27th stitra of the IInd chaptor. Whether this 1 owing to the original MS. having had no more of it, or the student who copied it, failing to complete his transcript,’ does not appear. The marginal gloss is chiefly of use inasmuch as it supplies Sanskrit translations of all Prdkrit examples and quotations ; it also well illustrates the manner of the native grammarians in applying grammatical rules to the explanations of word-forms. For these reasons I have added a few extracts ‘ from it in the footnotes, appended to the text and preceding the critical appa- atus. The MS. C bears no date; but, of course, it must be of quite modern , origin MS. D belongs to myself. It was given to me by my friend Pandit * .Réma Misra, the same gentleman who procured for me MS. C. It is a very fair MS., though not so good as C. It is clearly and carefully written ; but it is not without mistakes, which, .however, ‘being obvious clerical _ errors,t are of no account and, therefore, have generally not been no- ` ticed in the critical footnotes. It is on paper and consists of nine- teen leaves, with six lines to every page. It isa quite modern copy, of 1876 which Pandit Rama Migra caused to be prepared for me from an old MS. in ©... ` the possession of a Pandit, resident in some village in the State of Alwar. , , This original MS. also I have been unable to procure, on account of the death — in the meantime of its owner! The orthography of all the four MSS. exhibits the peculiarities of | ` what has been called the Jaina Prdkrit.t MS. © is written in the Jaina `:
* The very curious error, noted on p. 13 (तिष्टति) made me at first inclined to look , upon the gloss as a mere modern addition, possibly made by the student himself. But the fact, that one of its remarks with reference to siitra I, 18 occurs as part of the text in MS. . ऋ; renders this improbable. In any case, the author of it cannot have been a very leamed “ pandit ; though for that matter, the author of the text itself, as ¢ontained in 0, does not ., Show very favourably. See, ¢ $) the clumsy way in which sitra OD I, 6a is drawn.
1 Thus UXT for WEG, भिरिणं for गिरो शं, 1, 5; Sanskrit TUL for येषां in I, 8, oto.
} They rather seem to be the peculiarities of the Western Indian style of writing generally. I have noticed them in other than Jain writings; ९, g., inthe MSS, of the 0 Prithirdéja Rasau. Most Jaina writings are from Western India. On Jaina Prékrit orthography, see Webor Bhagavati, pp. 383-392, 2. Miiller, Bettrdge zur Grammatih die Taina Prdkrit, pp. 11, 29, 30, Jacobi, Kalpa Sutra, pp, 17-21, Klatt, Dhanapdla's Rishabhe
2
1 ~ Taw
te.
f
Infrodugticn to Praldgita Lakshanam. रो ऋ. f 2 a: 4 5. 6. 7. é ८ hu १९९८. ८८. dit, gu. fae. 24. ` | ; | ८.1 | | aD (४. hkh, hhh 14६0 kkh OY. fd i. Lu 20 2. Yu hokh. uh. sth ay efi Wh. yp Dah, Ps 2८ ५८ WALL yh Dn. „7/4 Lh. Ue. TILE Sok YA 779 Uh yh । th J6 yh phh hbh bbh:.. 207. ८7" mbh. bbh or nidle Tati E Printed By We Newsies. fe a
FACSIMILES OF MSS. LETTERS.
we ogee, Cee
INTRODUCTION. vo
Prdkrit style; MS. D also, but not so uniformly. MSS. A and B are written in the ordinary Nagari of Hastern Hindistin, but they show unmis- takeable traces of having been copied from originals written in the Jaina or western style. These orthographic peculiarities (sce Plate) may be divided
“into two classes, graphic and phonetic, To the former belong
` 1. The symbol No. 1 (in the Plate) for ०. In MS. © this is always carefully distinguished from ख w MS. D # a few cases confuses them.™* But in A and B they are not only perpetually confused, but sometimes even
` ऊ (४) or स (ur) is written ; thus showing that the copyists had no notion of
the meaning of that Jaina symbol. 2. In MS, © win conjunction with certain consonants has a peculiar
shape. " See Nos. 2—7.
8. The two symbols Nos. 8 or 9 for jz and No. 10 for g are always care- fully distinguished in C ; but are much confounded in D. The ordinary Nagari symbol ड d, however, is also occasionally used in D; in C it is the usual one
4. The substifiute ष् for ख्, so common in modern writing, never occurs
in Cand D. In Bit is found once; ०४२.) IIT, 15 weer for way. On the | वि
other hand, MS. 4 185 once the very unusual substitute @ for ष ; viz. ITI, 14
— - qrary for पाषाण.
5. The use of the symbols 4 8 and व ¢ 28 very uncertain. Thus C has in juxtaposition besum and ८०७४ (I, 8), dehim and vehi (I, 1), dahd (I, 3) and vahiie (I, 9). MS. D has 228४ and rivum CI, 8), 04८८ and 450८ (II, 16), &. On. the whole C follows the Sanskrit use, while D prefers ४. MSS. A and.B are no | less uncertain ; thus A has wuddht and buddhiw (आ, 10), ट्ट and gdévthim
(II, 16); B has dehinto (I, 18), and vehim (I, 7), &e. On the whole B pre~ | aa fers ४.¶ As it was necessary to observe some system, I have followed MS, ~
ae .. © in being guided by Sanskrit usage.
6. There is also much uncertainty in the use of the symbols स $ and
“ats; though more soin A and B, than Cand D. In C the confusion occurs ‘- rarely; 6. 9., silay (I, 30), and commonly Sanskrit sia. In D it is much au | more frequent; ¢. g., 3252 for sasi (I, 22); smasdnag for smasdnam, strshah oe for sérshaj, &e. In A and B it is very common; thus in A and B, sese, hagse | :
1 pasuta for sese, hagse, pasutta, (IV, 89) ; in A t/sanham for tisapham (I, 6) `` The substitution of s for 5 is much more common than the reverse
7. The symbols Nos. 11 or 12 for कष often occur in D, [प 4 धात् 8 °,
Panchdsihd in J. G. O. S., vol, XXXII, pp. 447, 448, also Stovonson, Kaloa Sutra, | ॥ os pp. 137-148 7 * Once D writes ST for o
र Curiously enough, when B has 4, it uses it wrongly in Sanskrit words; ०, ¢+ dayamue : 7 ie
- for vayam (I, 3), beti kim (III 7), barga (III, 17), ०५१८ (III, 26)
VL | INTRODUCTION. «
these symbols are Nos. 18 and 14” CO always has the usual Nigarf symbol क्छ;
">. Which also oceurs twice in A. In a few cases A B D write simply @; © never ~
8. The symbol श्र for gg is very common in the marginal gloss, though not in the text, of C, Once or twice it occurs in D. Otherwise the ordinary
ध cS ^, -Nagari form wr ig used. In the originals of A and ए, however, it must [दष्क . "` ‘been almost universal. The copyists evidently did not know it ; for they com-
कः pattham for pachehham (III 26). D uses the ordinary Négari symbol च्छ for ,' -both ehohh and tth; thus pachchham = Skr. pathyam and pachehho for pattho
monly write it as y gn or गजे 66 Nos. 15 and 16. Only once doos A give’ the correct transcription सा, in aggissa (I, 18) 9. Thesymbols, No. 17 for chchh and No. 18 for ##h, are generally distin. . guished in C; there are only two exceptions, vig., echehhu for etthu (I, 11) and oF
¥
= Skr. pdr'thah in III, 26. A and B transcribe them correctly by the ordinary ~
२ `. UNégari च् chehh and त्व tth; though the commonly write merely इ chh in the ‘place of च्छ chehh. On the other hand C and D commonly write No. 17 and
fe by ।
a respectively in the place of x chh. | ; 10. The symbol of 77 is No. 20 or 21, correctly transcribed in A and B
+. 11, The symbols Nos 9226 or Nos, 27 and 28 for j7h are used in 0
and D. The copyists of A and B, not understanding the former, variously
+ agnseribe it by Nos, 29--86 a vac; 12. . Lhe symbol g for pth is commonly used by A, B,D; rarely Zor | ae O has always ठ," Similarly the symbols ¢ or gy for ddh aze commonly used ~
by all four MSS. I may here add the genergl remark, that conjuncts consist. >
"ding of the unaspirate and aspirate of the same class, are treated with great `
laxity, as regards writing them ; though, doubtlessly, they were always pra» ` mounced- correctly (accarding to the rules Oh. ITI,.26. Vr, IID, 51. H. 0. 11, 90). . : ‘Thus’ hard aspirate ‘conjuncts might be written in three ways: either thé... ‘aspirate alone, or the aspirate doubled, or (the correct form) the aspirate pres ^ ceded by its unaspirate. A sonant aspirate conjunct might even be written in four ways: either the. aspirate alone, or the aspirate doubléd, or the aspirate ५ preceded by. the hard unaspirate, or (the eorrect form) the aspirate =. - = preceded by ifs sonant unaspitate. Examples of nearly each of these varieties - ’ a ay be found in the four MSS. of Chanda, I have.met with every one of them |.“
x
6 the MSS. of the Prithiréj] Rasau. Thus the symbol No. 87 is strictly pbk, - : Pa
‘while: Nos, 38.07 89 are 63h. Similarly Nos. 18 and 14 (in the Prithiréj et) --! Vy
यापि while Nos. 11 and 12 are hhh | - - , The symbols g, च, च, च, axe often-confounded in A and B, शकय, |, that the copyists were imperfectly acquainted with the orthography of the - aoe
: _ + "Tho fortier axe to: he soon in, Weber's Bhayavati, Plate ¥, lines 6 and 8 (काणक) 7 ee a * (PRE latior- were in, MS..W of the Prétrita Prakkiga, a8 noted by Cowell, p, 90, (satire, 20)
` . originals. It may be observed that, as a rule, च dh is a mistake for च cheh and. | ८) , ध 7 0 gov; thus the former occurs in A सथिय (II, 17) for सुचिय, Bera
INTRODUCTION. Vil
(III, 9) for era; the latter in B पेतः (III, 9) for पव्वेतः. The occasional use
_of @ or = for @ is peculiar to D; ० $. कदं for wey (IIL, 2), yer for gat -{6 D IIT, 15a)
14. The symbol No. 89 is used by O for 40% and mbh. MS. D has
‘No, 88; and A B have Nos. 29, 40 and 41
15. The mis-spelled symbol च Am occurs very frequently in Band D. In A it is vory rare ; in C it never occurs
16, The symbol q or मु is very commonly written in A and B, in the 1
place o£ an anusvara, at the end of a phrase or sentence (see footnote to I, 1); never in Cand D. In A the class nasal 18 not unfrequently written instead of the usual anusvdra, in conjuncts; e. g., lingancha (I, 2), hiticha (1,17),
| , tumandevo (I, 19), kinte (1, 28), jalanti (I, 12), vambhand (LI, 12), &
The phonetic peculiarities of the Jain Prakrit observable in the MSS. are two ?
1. The preserice of the dental न 9 In MSS. A and B, न, whether single or conjunct, is always used when standige at the beginning of a word,
_ and almost always when in the middle of a word. In MSS, Cand D, न is | every where changed to श्, in accordance with the commoner Prdkrit usage = `
(see Vr. II, 42). This is rather a strange circumstance, sceing that the two
` 88. © and D otherwise exhibit, in many ways, a more distinetly Jain , character than A and B; compare, «. g., their introductory salutation, and their , ` , additions in stitra I, 5.* ध
। 2. The so-called ya-sruti, ४ 6. the insertion of an euphonic य् y between: , two vowels, the latter of which must bea, while the preceding may be any ,
i one. ‘This rule, however, is not uniformly observed in the MSS
The text presented in these four MSS, differs very greatly, The most ` ५.५४ || obvious difference is in extent, ag will be seen at once from the relative size cee, . : . Of the MSS and from the list of sitras appended to this edition. The MSS... =: 7 me न may be divided into two classes. The text of A and B is substantially the same, ° । ^ ५, ५, , 80 is that of © and-D; but while the former MSS. contain 99 sittras divided ` “.°'.. inte three chapters, the latter extend to 126 and 128 stitras distributed into ` ~. ~ four chapters. _The owner of A and B; who however had not examined his ` १ कण expressed a suspicion that they'were fragmentary.t On first receiving raat <. them, I. was myself’ inclined to think, that they contained a mutilated text...’ ध , Bat further examination soon showed me, not only that A and B contained . ५
"a oémpléte, but that, in fact, they contained an older and a more original a
* For-a, possible reason of this circtmstance, 866 below p. xxiv. ~ t See Frocesdings, Asiatic Society. of Bengal, November 1878 4 । |
(Wilh | INTRODUCTION.
_ text than © and D; that of the latter two MSS. being a much later, rearranged
.\. and enlarged, recension of the text of A and B. I shall here describe some «~» .: OF the most striking points of evidence: others will be noticed in the foot-
(11 “notes to the English translation
| a र, In the first place, as to the originality of the text of A and B. The order 0. of the Stitras I, 19, 20, 21 in A and B is consistent, while their order I. 19, 21, 20 in Cand D is inconsistent and necessitates an unusual interpretation
. of the term cha “algo” in sitra I, 20. The word cha “ also”, used as a gram-~
` ~ matical technical term, has a well-known and well-defined meaning. It
é ` always refers to the preceding rule and implies that what is mentioned there रः, is also applicable to the rule in which cha occurs, Thus in MS. A and B, ~" shtra I, 19 qa सौ सविभक्तौ is followed by I, 20 “fa qey. The term च .. “ dn the latter indicates, that the form तु सं mentioned in the former is also to. ><". be understood in the latter. The Revisionists, however, in order to dispose Of all stitras referring to the nominative case before those relating to the ee acousative, change the order of the sitras, placing them thus: I, 19. तुमं सौ = संविभक्तौ, 1, 21 ae जसि, I, 20 अभि तुए च. But when the stitras are thus placed,
| । „ the term च would imply that ¥ हि of the preceding stitra is also to be understood me _in.the last sitra. As this result would be manifestly wrong, the Revisionists
व widerstood, and, therefore, alter the sttra tof तुर ad a च (see App oD p. 4k), 80 that here च does nof.réfer to a preceding sitra but to.a part of © . the stitra itxelf in which it occurs! There could hardly be a clearer piece of ‘evidence as to which of the two texts is the original Again the omission of the stitra IIT, 10 in त. and D disturbs the origi-
: Ganalertb conjunct consonants are treated of in the first nine sttras (III, ” `" 1-9) ; the remaining stitras (ILI, 11—89) are devoted to the treatment of ‘single consonants ; the intermediate stitra (III, 10) is intended to indicate: this division.* In the first part (III,1—9), all conjuncts are reduced to sin- &. cohsonants, by eliding, in some way or other, all consonants of the cont unich save one. Having thus simplified the problem, 80 as to have none but ingle consonanty (whether original or resultant) to deal with, Chanda next
-- become 86. a8 the result of the simplification of a conjunct consonant
र - बढि desert into the last stitra the forms, which ought to be indicated by 4.‘ `
“nally consistent plan on which the third chapter is drawn in A and B, and . | ee | eonsequaritly necessitates in ( and D a very inconsistent use of the sibilant qs 8 v: In the séitras of that chapter. According to the plan of A and B in that chapter, . ^
“proceeds ‘in -the second part (III, 11—89) to enumerate the manifold changes , ° ; : ele ।
0 + ‘No. other division of the consonants, so far 98 these stitras are concerned, is recog. : ’ 2 । # । (प्पे; पद, difference, whether the conjunct or single consonant is medial or re "Initial; or ‘whether the. single consonant is one which was originally single or has only ^ , ५.
: INTRODUCTION. x -that the single consonants (no matter, whether original or resultant) may | undergo. Now in the second part Chanda rules that every single wf इ or ष sh ` ` changes to # s in Prdékrit (III, 18); so that as regards s¢mgle consonants, सः 5 represents the whole sibilant class, Hence whenever else, in the second part, Chanda has to speak of the sibilant class, he simply indicates it by the . use of सु s. Thus we have sttra ITI, 14 सकारस्य खदद्ाः, illustrated by दण = दद; again sitra ILI, 89 सागधिकायां ware qv, illustrated by wa: == Wm. Here ws and & sh are indicated by ¥ $, because by stitra ILI, 18 they are no more Ws and ¥ sh, but have been already changed to स 55 that is, SW == SH == द् द, and Ws: = FHF = WH.* This procedure, of course, could . not be applied to the first ष (III, 1—9) which treats of conjunets and which is not affected by 5६४ III, 18. In that part, स 5 cannot represent the whole sibilant class ; for there the three Sanskri€ sibilants, as such, become the subjects of change. In the first part, therefore, either all three sibilants miust-be enumerated severally whenever the sibilant class is spoken 02. or some | other short sign for them must be adopted. Chanda elected the latter eourse, and the sign he selected appears to have been the sibilant Ws; most probably on account of its being the first in the sibilant series (w, ष, स). ~ Thus in stitra III, 2 wae aera, श represents yin खग == way, and श in रातय = सातव्वु, That is, व ४ and <r are respectively elided after स ¢ and ws; next स sand w 5, having nuw become single consonants, pass into the second part, where शर s at once comes under the operation of rule - IIT, 18 and furns into स s; whilc स s, of course, remains unchanged.f | I think it will: be admitted that in this arrangement Chanda follows’
a simple and consistent method. Now what do the Revisionists of C and , 1 , . | s ५
D dof They omit stitra III, 10, thereby abolishing the division of the two
parts; and they do this'for the purpose, evidently, of making stra 1, 18 ` ` | ॥ 0 ` applicable to the whole third chapter, and dispensing with the double ह्ण;
". ~ of ws and सु 8. Consequently they use ख. s throughout the chapter to oe
indicate the whole sibilant class, because according to their intention the ~.-. sibilants इ and ष sh practically do not exist, having at once changed to स s.
५ $ Tt will be observed, that the intermediate steps दस and @ are here introduced. „^< "~ (तरः 9 silent reference to stitra ITT, 18. - Such “silent references” occur in all Prékrit ae ~s/ Coismmegiats. Ag an instance from Hemachandra, I may mention his sitra I, 259,
ध _-whteré he rules that the ¢ of svapna becomes m; but in reefity the p of svapna, having ` bos “ : ५ :, , टक १.9 silent reference to sitra I, 231, becomes m. ` That the 2, not the», of seapna ` ee aS
| : “is ‘referred.£d in I, 269, miay be seen by comparing the siitras I, 46 and II, 108 es # Sie whole sibilant class is also spoken of in sttra IIT, 23, but though that sttra. <i 3"
is ini the seoond part, the sibilants are referred to there, not as single consonants, buf as“ »
parts of a confines, -Elunve, naturally, the sibilant used fo indicate thom is not @ s, hub ` ^ शं? (५ |
x INTRODUCTION.
Thus © D read qawaar asta in siitra IIT, 2 and illustrate it by the example ओतव्यं = सातव्वं ; that is, they make स 5 to indicate w s, because, according to them, 31Taay changes, by silent reference to rule III, 18, into area ; whereupon <r is elided by rule III, 2. This process, no doubt, simplifies the original method, by substituting one sign for the sibilant cluss in the place of two; but it does so at the expense of all symmetry and consistency of the original plan; for with the exception of those two sitras ILT, 10 and III, 18, all others are still treated as if the original plan of the division into two parts, referring to conjuncts and singles respectively, were still in force. This inconsistency becomes especially glaring in the case of sitra IIL, 8 wre टः, which, on the revisionist principle, ought to have been changed to साट् टः. For just as in the previous case 4Taai becomes, by silent reference to rule III, 18, @raai, so here we becomes by the same rule wee ; next स 5 would be clided. So that, consistently, स s should here have been written to represent ष sh. On the other hand, on the original plan, the spelling of stitra षाट् टः is correct ; it could not have been spelled wre खः, because the sibilant ¥ sh is the only (conjunct) sibilant to which the rule applies. Briefly, the matter as be- ` tween Chanda and his Revisionists stands thus: Chanda uses w $ to denote the whole sibilant class, whenever the rule is applicable to all the sibilants severally ; hence when the rule applies to only one member of the sibilant class, he cannot use Ws, but must use that member itself. On the other hand, he uses सृ 5 to
५: denote the whole sibilant class, whenever ex hypothesi (that is, by silent refer-
‘ence to rule III, 18) no longer any other sibilant, but स $, is supposed to exist. ‘This terminology, however, presupposes and necessitates the division of the chapter into two parts, which I have alvoady explained. The Revisionists abolish the division and accept only the lavter half of Chanda’s terminology. But then, in consistency, they are precluded from using any other sibilant: (than स) as an indicatory in any stitra; for, ex hypothesi, no longer any other
sibilant, but स s, 18 supposed to exist. The matter is complicated; but I trust I have succeeded in making it sufficiently clear. Perhaps a complete understanding of the point at issue will not be attainable, unless by prac- tically working through the examples, as I have done, by the light of either ‘of the rival theories. Unfortunately the matter is further complicated by
`, the uncertainty of the spelling in the MSS. A and B. How little reliance
can be placed on their spelling may be seen from the fact, that MS. B spells
ee ‘wat for vt in stitra ITT, 39. ‘Limust reserve the discussion of this subordinate
‘point, however, for the footnotes to the translation. In the text, I have
restored W 5 in all stitras, in which the original plan of Chanda requires it
in III, 2. 4. 6. 28.*
The only two Prakvit Grammarians, who, to my knowledge, use a sanjiid or sign for the sibilant class are Trivikrama and Subhachandra. Tho formor uses W su (व, ४,
i we # , ५५ ^ #
INTRODUCTION, XL
Next, as to the relative age of the texts of the two sets of MSS., the ¦ wording of stitra III, 34in MSS. A and B indicates a much more ancient phase of the Prakrit layguage, than the wording of the same sitra in MSS.
© and D; and this cireumstance is confirmed by stitras III, 11, 12, which are consistent with the wording of the svitra III, 84 in A and ए, but not with that in Cand D. It is further confirmed by the omission in A and B
of all reference to the (so-called) Sauraseni dialect, that is, by the omission
, of stitra ITI, 89a which refers to one of the most. incisive differences botween
` that dialect and the (so-called) MAh4rdshtri ; a difference which, at the period
settled. A comparison of stitra JIT, 84 with दक
of the formulation of the rules as they are in the text of A B, evidently did not
yet exist, while it was fully developed at the time when the text © D was {12 and of III, 13 with
, III, 11 shows that at that period when the text delivered in A B was written, hard medial -single unaspirate consonants were not elided, nor hard medial single aspirates reduced to ¥ & (with the exception of क & and ख xh), though occasionally the former were changed into the correspond- ing soft consonants. On. 806 ` other hand a comparison of those stitras, : as they stand in A B, with the same stitras, ag C D have them, shows that at
a 7 ` : #6 period, when the text contained in C D was written, all unaspirate con- “"" gonants (exc. ड क and ट ¢), whether surd or sonant, were elided, while all "^ aspirate consonants, whether surd or sonant (exc. palatals and cerebrals) were
_ reduced to ¥ ¢. I shall have to recur to this important point presently.
With the exception of the omission in D of the siitras II, 1a, 1b, 10, the texts of C and D are nearly identical, There is a much greater difference be- tween the texts of A and B. The latter (MS. B) contains some additional matter, one parb of which is peculiar to ए, while the other it has in common with C and D. On the other hand, A has nothing in common with © D, which does not also occur in 3. = Though, therefore, the texts of A‘and B are sub- stantially the same, yet B occupies a slightly intermediate position between A on the one hand, and C D on the other. The general result, thus, is that the original grammar of Chanda presents a very old phase of the Prakrit.lan- guage, and that the MS. A contains that grammar in its oldest and most: genuine form; but that this grammar has undergone at various periods, more (in © D) or less (in B) thorough-going revisions
I, 1, 7.) ; the latter has fix (S.C. + 1. 7). Chanda’s sanjad जर sa is perhaps somewhat anomalous ; for with Sanskrit Grammarians it is usual to add ४ or varga to a consonant, in ‘order to form a sanjid (e. ¢.) कु or RAF for the guttural class). This may have been one of the reasons for the alteration of the Revisionists. Bit itis possible that Chanda’s sign may really have been W or TH; in sitra 114, MS. B reads सो, which may be an error for सौ (श्रौ) ; and ष्टौ would be the locative of प्रु or TH > 8ee the footnote to translation
of sittra ITT, 4,
xi INTRODUCTION,
Tf that had been all, there would not have been much reason for complaint, Unfortunately, the Revisionists have not been content with merely revising or rather recasting and enlarging Chanda’s grammar; bat while leaving the framework, as it were, of the rules of Chanda untouched, they have attempted to adjust his grammar to a later phase of the language, by altering the spelling of the Prékrit words and forms, occurring in it, so as to bring them in agreement with that later phase. The result in soine cases is vory ‘Indicrous, Thus according to Chanda’s rule IIT, 11 य 7h changes प 4; by way of illustration the Revisionists make नाथः nithah to chango into नाद्धे। ndho. Again according to the rule III, 84 च ch, a #, 4 816 not elided; by way of
illustration we have GE 5४ for wa: suchih, वाञ्जा vdo for वातः 1710 नेर
neuram for नूपुर nipuram, ह direct defiance of rule ITI, 12. The ignoring of these three rules, indeed, has been consistently carried out throughout the grammar.* I¢ was impossible to print the text together with all these incon- sistencies ; and it became necessary to restore the original text, as far as it could be done with safety, | In reference to some of the most important cases of restoration, I shall now explain the reasons that have guided me. In the case of others of minor ‘importance my reasons for preferring a particular spelling will be found in _ the footnotes to the Nnglish translation. One important case of restoration ` ` regarding the sibilants has been already explained (see pp. IX, X). With ragard
1: to these restorations, though I conceive that they could not be avoided in a
"| scientific edition of the text and thongh I have given, of course, what after mature consideration of all relevant circumstances, appeared to me to have the
+” greatest probability, I can well foresee, and there is undoubtedly room for, dif.
ference of opinion. But considering the difficulties of the case, perhaps I may venture to hope an indulgent consideration of the results such as they are. A more generally satisfactory settlement of the text must wait for more and better MSS., especially of the older text, or for a more competent editor than myself.t * Another instance is sitra IT, 10, according to which the nominative singular of ६ ‘bases should end with a short +; but one of the examples given is buddh¢ for buddhi. . Similarly according to stitras I, 3 and I, 7 the instrumental plural in Prékrit has the same form as in Sanskrit, with the excoption of Sansk. bhis becoming Prék. ‰ ; the examples, however, ate aggthi, mahithi for aggihi, mahuhi = Sky. 4 madhubhih.
ms , See the further remarks in the Sketch of Chanda’s Grammar.
fe ° ` नँ As to the possibility or probabiity cf sach revisions of old texta by later hands, sf IT may quote Jacobi's remarks in his Intruduction 10 his excellent cdition of the Kalpa ` श (p. 4), “it has been considered as च proof af tha priority of Buddhism that Pali
` , 38 a more archaic language than thé Prélait uf whe dainas. ‘Lae Sct is true, but it proves
nothing. For the form of the Jaina stitras was fixcd only ono thonsand years after ‘Mahavira’s death. Tt is but reasonable, that during the preceding millennium the _ - language of the + underwent great alterations in consequence of the natural tondency |
INTRODUCTION. xii
(1). With regard to my restoration in the text of the surd consonants,
` my reasons were briefly the following :—
First.—There is (as already noticed on p. xi) the direct evidence of -stitras LIT, 11 and 34, which, admitting only the elision of ¢ and reduction ` of £h, by implication enjoins the retention of the other surds.
Second.—The most authentic information that we have as to the state of the oldest Indian Vernacular, in rock-inscriptions, &c., shows that, as a
7 _ rule, the surd consonants were retained, while the sonants might be elided ` : precisely what Chanda’s rules TIT, 12, 34 indicate
Third.—It will be seen from the critical footnotes to the text, tliat the MSS
. A-and Bin a few cases still retain an original त Thus in II, 26 A B read
भे छतं । लया कतं ॥ Originally, I think, the example must have stood भे कतं | aa छतं ॥ The copyist, not recognising कतं as a Prdékrit word, as it was an obsolete form, and mistaking it for an erroneous Sanskrit spelling, turned it into Wa. The Revisionists of C and D, on the other hand, recognising the old Prakrit form कृतं, but objecting to it on the score of obsoleteness, changed it. into the correct later Prékrit form कयं, This appears much more probable than to assume that the scribe of A and B, finding we (or even कयं ) in his
४ original, changed it into @d. On this view, it must be admitted that the
Revisionists of A and B, while carrying through their modernisation of the spelling of their text, occasionally overlooked a word and left it standing in its old dress. That, however, is nothing to be gvondered at. To us it is a cause of congratulation, as it helps restoring the original text. Fowrth.—Even as regards the Revisionists of © and 7 ; itis easier to under- stand their modernizing, ९, g., Ha into कयं, than ae ; for though कतं could not possibly have been later Prékrit, कद् might have been so. If they had found कद् or चच्छदि (II, 1) in their original text, they might have left them standing, | as the retention of sonant medial consonants in the later Prdkrit is not altogether unknown; but if they found कतं or च्छति, they could not do otherwise but change it into कयं and wage, if they wished to conform those
` words to the spelling of their own day.
Hifth.—Chanda’s rules merely state facts as facts, without defining the range of their applicability ; some of the rules are compulsory, others are not 80 $ but whether they are or are not so, does not appear on the face of the rule. Thus rule III, 16, although it might appear so at first sight, is undoubtedly not compulsory ; it enjoins the change of 42 to wn; butas a matter of fact an initial m never changes to Wz, and even a medial न # does so only in comparatively exceptional cases. The rule, in fact, states an exceptional fact but as it 25 a fact, the fact is duly noticed, though no intimation is given as to:
of those who handed down the siitras by oral tradition or writing to substitute current | ध
idioms for antiquated forms,” sec also श, pp. 19, 20, also pp, 15, 16, 17,
द, INTRODUCTION. ।
^. Hite frequency, whether it is constant or only oceasional.* The ease of rule IIT
"12 is similar; it’ states several facts, some of which are exceptional while others are nearly constant. Thus, in the face of rule ITI, 84, there can be little question, but that the change of w%to ग ¢ was a comparatively | ` , exceptional occurrence; on the other hand the change of ट {0 wd rust have been comparatively constant. It follows, therefore, that, as to the chango of aw é द् 4 and of yp to व 2, the rule docs not necessarily imply invariability.
“What the amount of its frequency may have been, must be judged from other
। । ' considerations ; and for the reasons given under Nos. 2, 8, 4, ib seems to me, that the change must have been a comparatively exceptional one, 2 ¢., as arule त £ and प p were retained. On the other hand, the retention of कं ¢ must have been comparatively exceptional; as a rule it was elided or, less ` frequently, changed to ग g.
Stxth.—In sitra II, 22 there is an undesigned coingidence which very strikingly proves the truth of my restorations. Among the substitutes of vat “like”, there is also mentioned jahd. Now jahdé is clearly the same : 88 the Sanskrit yathdé. Ifat the time of the language of the Grammar, it had been the universal practice to reduce a surd aspirated य ४४ to दद A, there would have been no conceivable reason for singling out the word कर for | particular notice. But if y ¢h at that time was not subject to change, or at : least only to घ dh, then jahd would at once become an exceptional form re- ` quiring particular notice, The Revisionists when remodelling Chanda’s gram-
° श्रा and reducing (according to the practice of their day) every 29 to A, failed
to notice the inconsistency of permitting jahd to remain in the sutra. Not so Hemachandra; he at once saw the inconsistency and, accordingly, when
- adopting the stitra into his grammar (see H. O. II, 182), omitted jahd.t There is, in stitra II, 28, a similar undesigned coincidence, showing that at the time of Chanda the surd unaspirates were not usually subject to elision. . Xn that séitra it is ruled that the Sanskrit 7 “thus”. changes in Prakrit to wa. If it had been usual at that time to elide all surd unaspirates, there would have been no need to say anything more in the siitra than that the
* The rule also enjoins the change of the dental consonants into palatal or cerebral, . As it occurs in that part of the grammar which applics to singlo consonants, the rule 28 it. stands would seem to apply to व singlo dental consonants. As a mattor of fact,
` ~, however, it has a very limited range and chiefly applies to such single dental consonants ` .. as had originally formed part of a particular compound. This circumstance is, no doubt,
` eonnected with the peculiar plan on which Chanda’s Grammar is drawn, and which has been briefly noticed on p. VIII and will be fully explained afterwards in the Analysis of his Grammar
t This is one of the indications (of which some more will be noticed afterwards) of ` the posteriority of Hemachandra to Chanda and his Revisionists,
INTRODUCTION. >.< ce
final i of ti changes to a. Now this is precisely what Hemachandra in his ors
grammar (see H. C. I, 91) does. In his time, it had long since become usual
to elide a medial त ४; accordingly, seeing that Chanda’s stitra stated more, _ than was needed, he reformulated it so as to omit what was superfluous. ' Chanda’s Revisionists, however, were again, more suo, not so wise as Hema~.,
_ chandra, but allowed Chanda’s stittra to keep its original wording.
It is much to be regretted that the Revisionists did not always act with | such inconsistency. But though in afew cases, and those not unimportant:
ones, it can hardly be doubted but that they did venture to tamper with the
stitras,* yet happily as a rule they contented themselves with the less
De objectionable process of only remodelling the commentary.
Seventh.—Let it be assumed, for argument’s sake, that Chanda spelled | a . his words with the hard unaspirates. In later times, as is known from ` प Vararuchi and Hemachandra, hard dentals (त) were, as a rule, elided, णा. ` hard labials (प) were generally softened (व). Accordingly one would expect — ` ` the revision of Chanda, made by the authors of C and D, to conform to the later , त , 1096068. , On examination, it will be found that that is so. I have counted all. ८ | mig gases of hard unaspirates in that portion of Chanda which is common to all four. me - व oe : MSS. There are altogether 50 instances of the hard dental (त) ; among these,” ।
`, 07 elide it 47 times, soften it twice and retain it once.+ Of the hard labial an (प) there are 10 cases ; among these C D elide it only once, in the remaining nine cases they soften it (to व). But further, having thus changed the original spelling, the Revisionists could not help observing that the result was incon- sistent with the express rule III, 34 of the grammar they were revising,
: ep ‘Hence to allow of their eliding the hard dentals (and the hard unaspirates
= * These are, strictly speaking, only stitras I, 16, IL, 4, 6, where all four MSS. 21689 ॥ । in giving the revised reading. In all other revised stitras, my rostored, reading has the ष “support of some, one or more, MSS.; thus, of B in sitra I, 21 and in IIT, 28, of AB in I, 19, 20, IL, 14, 19, 21, IIT, 2, 13, 22, 34.
+ The softenings are, WE in the special stitra III, 11 and इ वदि in tho Mégadhi
ae sittra IIT, 39. In both cases, the softening is fully accounted for by the purport of ae the sitra. Tho retention is in पलातं in siitra I, 23. A retains त in 4 cases (I, 23,
a का, 2, 26. 7, 89); and B in 5 cases (I, 28. II, 26. ITT, 9. 25. 389). These retentions are doubtlessly mere oversights.
{ The solitary case of elision is AUX, which [ am inclined to think a very old exceptional caso ; perhaps already existing in Ohanda’s time. It is however worth noting, that C spells Hat in II, 4 (confirmed by the marginal gloss); though it has नेर in III, 84. In one case (पनर पि TI, 10) D retains T; so also A once (रूप I, 17) ; these are probably more oversights of the Reviser. Similarly A once retains ख (IIT, 3), and A B once retain ठ (I, 8 qe ) [NB --परण्रबि in the Toxt, p. 16, is 8 misprint for
पणरपि.]
4, fd ॥ ५. “ पि ।
a“ ४
अ) ` | INTRODUCTION.
generally) they made the needful change in the terms of that siitra (compare |
the terms of stitra III, 34 in the Appendix C D with those of the same stitrain the Text); and, on the other hand, to allow of the softening of the hard labial (च) notwithstanding the revised terms of stitra III, 84,
they further altered the terms of stitra IIT, 22 (from यवथोर् were: to |
पवयोर्, ae) and inserted an altogether new stitra (see Appendix C.D, p. 50),
Through these changes, the Revisionists again placed themselves in agres-
ment with the stitras. It should be noticed that, with regard to these
changes, since they are consistent with one another, both Vararuchi and ` `
Hemachandra follow the lead of the Revisionists; compare H. ©. I, 177, 281, and Vr. IT, 2, 15. Tt is different, as regards the treatment of the
aspirate hard consonants. Instead of changing the terms of stitra I II, 18 ` in a manner analogous to their change of the terms of stitra III, 84 ` ` _
(that is, inserting the hard aspirates into the former stitra), the Revisionists
of C D now take the opposite course of omitting 42 in stitva IIT, 18 and °
subsuming it under sitra III, 11. Their theory, namely, is that hard aspirates, having changed to sonant ones by III, 11, may now, by silent reference to JII, 18, further change to 4; thus, in the examples of stitra III, 11, they change both य th and ख kh to इ ¢. On this theory, of course,
0 (क
the special mention of Ah in प्र IIL, 18 is superfluous; accordingly the |
. Revisionists omit it there. But there can be no doubt that this oxpedient ‘to re-establish consistency is a clumsy and misleading one. Vararnuchi and Hemachandra, therefore, have discarded it; they very naturally have pre- ‘ferred to alter the terms of sttra IIT, 13, after the analogy of the change of the terms of sutra III, 384, which is a much more simple way of putting themselves in order; compare H. C. I, 187, 236 and Vr. IT, 27, 26 (2). Another restoration is the form 20000046 in sitra I, 21. Here © and D read tumhe jasi. That twmhe cannot be the original reading, but is probably adopted from I, 3, I shall show in the footnote to the translation of the sitra. The question is, what the original reading may have been. <A reads tubbhe and B reads tumbhe ; but in stitra I, 22 they have the same reading respec. tively, A tubbhe and B tumbhe. Chanda cannot possibly have written the same word in both sttras; that would be contrary to the whole genius of stitra- writing ; if the same word had been intended, there would, undoubtedly have been but one sutra: ८६४८006 (or tumbhe) jassasoh. In the original grammar, then, there must have been a different word in I, 21 from that in I, 29, ` Next, ib must be observed that in the MSS. A and B the conjuncts mbh, 270 and igh are perpetually confused ; the two symbols म्व or मर being made to do
os _ duty promiscuously for any one of them (see the Plate). Thus B spells favar for
# Once or twice also and प > those are clearly only duo to carcless wriling.
INTRODUCTION. XVI
“, ,. . सिका, 2, जिम्बा for जिव्मा ITT, 1, avr for वङ्का 117, 20; ward for सन्भौय ¦". ^... III, 8, wer for मञ्ज, 80. There is a simple explanation for this confusion, In the Jaina Prakrit the symbols for those three conjuncts are so nearly alike, that
for any one unacquainted or unpractised in reading them it is difficult to distinguish them.* ‘There can be very little doubt, that the MSS. A and B
were copied from an original MS. written in the Jain characters, and that the
words used in the stitras I, 218 I, 22 contained those difficult Jain symbols,
which being undistinguishable to the transcriber were represented by him
_ by one and the same Nagari symbol, Since however the two sitras neces-
क sarily require two different words, it is evident that the Jain original must have comtained two different symbols. The question is, which were they,
= from among the three. As to stitra I, 22 the answer is comparatively easy ; “sa. # must have contained the symbol for 00h. . For that is the symbol which “¦ appears in C and D in sitra I, 22 (and also in कैः where the word. re-occurs), On ‘this point © and D may be trusted; the former was written by a man we of the Jain religion and isin Jain characters; the latter, though not uni- formly in Jain characters, was evidently written by a person well acquainted with the peculiarities of Jain writing; and both C and D never confound ‘the symbol for 864 with those for jj or mbk. The case is more complicated as to stitra I, 21. Here even C and D cannot be directly appealed to, as they have a different reading. Yet indirectly their reading ^ 1 1 |, tumhe declayes for twmbhe having been the original one. For it is easier . , #0 conceive that twmbhe has been modified into ¢umhe than that tujjhe should
\ ` , have done so, Even at the present day mh and mbh constantly interchange
in the Indian vernaculars. In Hindi, ¢.9., thamhai “he supports” may be variously spelled thdmbhat. For these reasons Ihave adopted the spelling
tumbhe in I, 21, and tubdhe in I, 22
(3). For some important restoratiens in nominal declension, the reader is referred to the remarks on the declension of nouns in 7 and w, in the Sketch of Chanda’s Grammar.
The subject of the restorations in Chanda’s text naturally leads a step further to the question of the age of himself and the language of which he treats in his grammar. If my arguments regarding what must have been
16 language of the original Chanda are correct, if would follow that his Prakrit was very closely allied to what is commonly known as Pali. Thi will be shown more in detail in the comparative Sketch of Chanda’s grammar Here it will suffice to point out, that Chanda’s Prakrit represents a somewhat
, later. phonotic stage of the old Indian Vernacular than Pali. It agrees
x
* The closo resomblance of tho symbol for mdz to thoso for 204 and gh is strikin gly shown in stitra LT, 2, where C appears to read अद्रवं and D sibbha for simbhd.
XVill INTRODUCTION.
with Péli, in retaining, as a rule, the surd consonants, aspirate and unaspirate ;
> but it differs from Pali in eliding, as a rule, the sonant unaspirates and “© -yedueing to 7 the sonant aspirates ; the surd gutturals being treated in both
languages respectively after the analogy of the sonants. Still, if the MBS. may be trusted, there is one very striking instance in which Chanda’s Prékrit represents an older phouctie stage than even का This is the
accusative singular of feminine nouns in d, ददत् #, and of the first and
second personal pronouns. Here Chanda’s Prakrit agrees with Sanskrit in preserving the long vowel (sec I, 3), while Pali as woll as the lator Prd- krit shorten it; ¢. g., Skr. and Ch. gufigim, but Pd, and Pr. gaigam ; Sky. nadim, Ch. naim, but Pd. nadim, Py. naim ; Skr. mim “me”, Ch. mdm, but P&. mam, Pr. mam. Both Vararuchi and Hemachandra have special rules to enjoin the eee | yin the later Prakrit (see Vr. V, 21. IZ. 6. IIL, 86) ; so also Kachchayana fol@the Pali (see Kach. II, 1, 83, p. 49), while
there is no trace of any such rule in Chanda; a fact which strongly makes for
the correctness of the forms given in I, 3.* It may now be asked, what language this old Prékrit of Chanda may
have been. As the title page of the present edition shows, I incline to identify it with the <A’rsham of Ilemachandra (H. C. I, 2. IV, 287). By “ 4rsha”” Hemachandra understands the language, spoken (as he says) by the Rishist, or (as he says in IV, 287) the old langnage. With regard to this
Arsha Prékrit Hemachandra expressly states in his rule I, 3, that it cannot ,. a
be brought under strict rules$, and that all its rules are permissive only, nob =; : | |
compulsory§. This exactly agrees with what I have had already occasion”.
_ to point out (see p. XIII), that Chanda’s rules are only permissive ; 2. ¢., they | ee merely state facts without defining their constancy or variability ; they may. "ल
or may not be acted upon according to circumstances which must be ascer-
tained from other sources than the mule itself, Again after giving in IV, 287 |»
the ordinary Magadhi Prakrit rule, that the nominative singular of a-bases
ends in e, Hemachandra adds the remark, that the old (pordnam) or drsha
* The rule Kach. II, 1, 33 docs not apply tofem. nouns in 4; those are provided .. ' 7 ne |
for by स्पा TT, 1, 32. Now Chanda’s sitra TI, 1 corresponds to Kach. I, 1, 32, andéit
might be supposed that Ch. I, 1 would similarly necessitate the shortening ०९4. That: . | was evidently the opinion of the Revisionists of C D, who write gaigam and tam, but natm. | , “ae .. But it is vory improbable that in Chanda’s Prakrit ¢ should have remained long, while
_ & was shortencd, Either all three (4, ¢, ४) were shortened or none was shortened. Now ।
that ¢ and % wore not shortened, is admitted even by the Revisionists. The fact is, Oh. II, 1
is formulated so as to allow tho very forms gaiigdm, tedm; for these are due to sandhi
` (gangd + am, tva+ am) + Rshindmn idam drsham, ‡ H.O.T, 3. drsham prdkyitam bahulam bhavatt, § H.C, 1, 8. drshe hi sarve vidhayo vikalpyante, `
भ 2
INTRODUCTION. xix
Prékrit, in common with the Arddhamdgadhi Prakrit which it follows,
agrees with the Magadbi in regard to the termination of the nominative, © | singular, but not in any other respect. Then he goes on to quote, as an eae ध.
example of the Arddham4gadhi, the phrase hayare dgachehhat “which of | - the two has come.” The pordna or drsha form of it would bo, Akatare dgachchhate.* Now. this is the very example, which is givon in Chanda’s grammar, to illustrate his rule II, 10, that the nom. sing. may end in 6, It ` would thus appear from Hemachandra’s statemont, that by the term drsha he understands that ancient (pordna) form of the Prakrit language which included what in his day was called the Arddhamagadhi, and which, while agreeing with | the Magadhi as regards the termination © of the nom. sing., but differing from it with regard to the important changes of 7 to 7 and s to s (H. €. 4, 288) and some other minor points.peculiar to Magadhi, was in all other respects identical with the so-called Mdhérdshtri.~Or to put it in another way : Arddhamigadhi is the same as Mahdrashtri in all respects, except the nom. sing. in 6, which peculiarity it shares with the Magadhi; on the other hand. , . Mégadhi is identical with Arddhamégadhi in all respects, except the im. . portant changes of r to Z and s to ¢ (omitting minor points) which are peculiar
to the former. If we now substitute the short name Arsha in the place of _, “Arddhamagadhi plus Méhardshtri (of which jointly the Arsha is simply the.
¦ ancient form), we have an exact statement of the facts as represented in’) °''
Chanda’s Grammar. He speaks of four Prakrits, ४22. the Prékrit, the ` Magadhi, the Paigachi and the Apabhramsa. He omits all mention of the — so-called Mahardshtri and Sauraseni ; further. his rules on ¢he Prdkrit substan. :
tially contain everything, commonly ascribed to the Mahdrdshtri Prdkrit, with _ the addition however of the nom. sing. in ¢; while he makes his Mégadhi to ` differ from his Prakrit with regard to the changes of » to Zand s to $. It thus ' “seems to me very clear, that the Prakrit of Chanda is the drsha or ancient `
2 (pordna) form of the Arddhamagadhi, Méharashtri and Saurasen{.+
* Hemachandra’s words are: yad api “ pordnam addhamdgahabhdsdniyayam havat
suttam” ity ddind drshasya drdhamdgadhabhashaniyatateam dmndyi vyddhais tad api prdyo
syd eva vidhdndt, na vakshyamdnalakshanasya ; 2, ९) “what bas been said by the ancients regarding ‘the rules of the old language being governed by those of the Arddha- magadhi,’ that may be also understood of the present rule (viz. H.C. 4, 287), but of that rule only, not of the succeeding ones.” Jacobi’s interpretation of this important passage, if I understand it rightly, somewhat differs from mine; though the general tenor is the same. (See Kalpa Sutra, p.17.) I do not think Jacobi has quite caught . Hemachandra’s meaning. Hemachandra does not wish to contradict the old tradition, . but. only ‘guard his own grammar against a wrong interpretation of it, “ Rightly
understood”, he means to say, “the old tradition confirms my grammar, for it refers only to the first rule, not to the whole of my chapter on Magadhf.” . _. As a minor evidence of Chanda’s Prékrit being the Arsha, I may mention the oon
ge
Xx a INTRODUCTION,
It would at the same time seem to be proved by Chanda’s Grammar, that
त . ab that early period, the later division into Arddhamagadhi, Mahdrdshtri and
Sauraseni probably did not yet exist ; but that these three later subdivisions originally formed but one great language, which was looked npon as the
„` 1 (standard) Prékrit. By the side of this great or standard Prakrit, however, : oe there existed two other Prékrits of lesser importance, which, while substan- र ‘tally the same as the standard Prikrit, yet in a few very striking peculiarities differed from it, These two lesser Prékrits were the Magadhi and the
. | Apabhramsa, The striking peculiarity of the former was the change of +
and s to Z and $ respectively; that of the latter was the retention of -as part of a conjunct. That this was the state of the Prdékrits in Chanda’s
| . time is very clearly shown by his Grammar (comp. III, 37, 39). Tho oy question is, is ib possible to fix historically the time when that was the
ease. I believe we have in the language of the famous Rock-inseriptions
1; of Asoka the means of approximately fixing the date I cannot do better
‘than quote on this subject the remarks of General A. Cunningham in his
Corpus Inscriptionum Indicarum, vol. I, p. 43.* “The Inscriptions of Agoka i : are quite invaluable for the study of the vernacular languages of India, '° ४8 they present us with several undoubted and authentic texts of the common
language of the people in the third century B. C. As revealed in these engraved records, this spoken language was essentially the samef> throughout the wide and fertile regions lying between the Himalaya and Vindhya, from the - banks of the Indus to tha mouths of the-Ganges. ‘There. are, however, some
marked points of difference, which show that there were at least three |
distinet varieties of Péli (or Prékrit) in the time of Agoka. ‘These may be called, according to their geographical distribution, the Panjabi or north- western dialect, the Ujjeni or middle dialect, and the Mdgadhf or, castern dialect.” .General Cunningham, then, enumerates. those “marked points of difference,” The chief characteristic of the Panjdbi or the dialect of North-
if Western India, he says, “is the retention of the subjoined r”; that of the
“Méeadhi or the eastern dialect is “ the entire want of the letter r, for which 1 is uniformly substituted.” (Corp. I, I. pp. 48, 44.) If we substitute
non Apabhramsa for General Cunningham’s Panjébi, we have almost the very ou words of Chanda’s Grammar. It would be, however,. going too far, I think, । ^ tq aseribe that Grammar to the third century B.C. Probably it was.com-
~ fact, that certain forms which are expressly noted by, Hemachandra os peculiar to the Arsha, ore given as ordinary forms by Chanda; e. g., kefiw IL, 19, cf, H. 0. II, 146; suhumam or suhamam ITI, 30, of. H. C, IT, 101, 118, ete
a * 806) however, Lasson’s similar remarks in his Indian Antiquities, vol. II, p. 221. ` | | (५. io. (quoted fn Muir’s Sanskrit Texts, vol. TI, pp. 109, 182) 7
t The italicsin the extract are mine
en sot
प म RA i ETT SP MITE SDPO agin i REA RETO वि Inseriptions with 2 and mr and ^ © ५ ८ ; € > श २ n € {1 ष ‘i r ao 8 A ‘i .Subjoint द wo ~ Boundary of (4८. cad: Wester ९-2-76 | 243 ११2८6) ८12 ह्च of —, ५ | 250 oN Shahbanga 4 ^ ^ ` Ae aN riapardagarn’ Or a 1 i ५.५6 ४, he २९१९)7 € ल ut १८, ta ॥ 1 N 1 ye स the manies of lhe 1/1. 7/1 es \ ४ ave their (१0१. dates | ye ie Bol tre ८५०८८ neambrers Ps Khe ९४६ | ~ + (मे प ¢ / = i ¢ (4 Hs 2 ! i. धार ee 1 ia \ ne | १220 Sa, (०, a ५ ह प Lao
(OS QL caren
४ AUeahahad LPO
200 @ «८५१८५ GPU
=, t Bharhut \ १) (८ -८१९११२०.
Gt
230, | {1 सदव 7८१९0 \
ॐ, Ramagarh
> --- ae 3 Gara a] 250
1/2. 1.1 2400 १८८२८८८८
MA= Mahi Ka ere le M=Maheardshirc 4=Andhra
MAP
K= Kalinga OF INDIA 1 छ SHEWING TUE = [fa + ^ । } W= Waster Drdia 4 ॥| | $ T R | B (| T | 0 N = Central १९९९ OF THE
^. Inelige | PRAKRIT LANGUAGES
ष्पी = Southern, India. IN
B.C. 300—r1,
Bae So
: ~~ i = =
Leth: & Pemted by (0 Newnes oa rae Cadeanta,
INTRODUCTION, RX1 |
posed at a somewhat later time; for the elision of the sonant unaspirates = ,,
and the reduction to / of the sonant aspirates appear to have been a much. more generally prevailing practice in the language of the time of Chanda, . than in that of the time of Agoka, as exhibited in his Rock-inseriptions.*
As to the Paisichi, mentioned by Chanda in III, 38, it is provided for by the term “at least” in the above quoted extract from General Cunning. ham’s work. My view of the Paisichi, as I have explained more fully elsewhere (see Introduction to my Comparative Grammar of the Gaudian Languages), is that it is the name for the generally prevailing Prékyvit, as pro- nounced or rather mis-pronounced by the aboriginal population.
An attempt may now be made, with the help of the known localities of the Inscriptions, to approximately determine the boundaries of the areas, respectively occupied by the Prakrit languages, named by Chanda. One of the principal peculiarities of the Magadhi or Hastern Prikrit, mentioned by Chanda, is the substitution of 7 for 7.+ ' This is found in the Inscriptions of Khalsi, Mivrat, Lauriya, Sahasarfém, Bardbar, Ramagarh, Dhauli and _ Jaugada (see Map).t At Bairdt, one inscription shows it, the other does not; and the same is the 0986. क Allahabad. If, therefore, a line be drawn from Khalsi, southward to Bairét, thence eastward to Allahabéd and again. southward by .Rémagarh to Jaugada, that line will be the approximate boundary: between the Eastern or Magadhi, and the Western or Chanda’s Standard Prékrit. The former thus occupies the whole of Eastern India and the north-eastern half of Central India. The Standard Prakrit, on the other hand, occupies the south-western half of Central India, the whole of | Western India and an indefinite part of Southern India, probably down to , , the southern limits of the Maharashtra, Andhra and Kalinga kingdoms, The Northern or Apabhramga Prdkrit occupies Northern India, west of the’ Indus, where the Shahbizgarhi Inscription exhibits the peculiarity, attri.. | buted by Chanda to that Prakrit, o7z. the retention of the subjoined r. ।
Further Chanda mentions that in the Standard (or western) Prékrit, the . . । ’
nominative singular sometimes ends with an ¢, sometimes with ano. Now _ the Inscriptions at Sanchi and Riipandth show the termination e, while
* Professor Jacobi, in the introduction to his excellent edition of the Kalpa Siitra, men- tions another sign of the old vernacular, which appears to be borne out by Chanda’s gram. mar, “A trace ofa still older phase ofthe language (than Jaina Prékrit) is the optional | insertion of a vowel. between two consonants incapable of assimilation” (see p. 19, also | p. 4). This seems to be indicated by Chanda’s sitra III, 30 ”
_ + With regard to the other peculiarity of substituting the palatal s for the dental ॐ the Inscriptions seem to give no evidence; except one of them at Rémagarh, which has `, $ throughout
{ This map is based on the frontispicce-maps in Genoral Cunningham’s Ancient
Geography of India, Vol, I, and his Corpus Inscriptionum Indicarum, Vol. I
XX INTRODUCTION.
those of Girmdr, Deotek and Khandagiri have o. Thus a line drawn from Bairét, in a south-easterly direction towards Deotek and thence eastward gto the Magadhi area, will approximately divide the e-area of the Western ` Prékrit from its o-area. The former of these two areas may be described ‘as that of, what was afterwards called, the Arddhamdgadhi Prékrit, because . this Prdkrit possesses the termination € in common with the Magadht. .. Lhe other subdivisional area will, then, be that of, what in later times come to be called, the M&h4rdshtri and Saurasenit Prakrits. The Paisichi must ` have been current in the southern half of Central India and in the whole of Southern India, in the wild regions to the north and south of the Vindhya
range of mountains _ Another chronological question, on which the foregoing investigations . ` \ throw, some light, is that of the relative age of Chanda and his Revisionists with regard to the two other well-known Prakrit Grammarians, Vararuchi .. and Hemachandra. As regards the latter, I have already (p. xiv) incident. ally shown grounds for believing that he must have been acquainted with Chanda’s Grammar, in the recension of the Revisionists. Indeed, as to ` Qhanda’s Grammar generally, that is almost capable of demonstration. In “,.. his stitra ITI, 81 Hemachandra rules that the three pronouns idem, tad, = छ _etad assume the form sein the genitive singular and the form sim in the ee genitive plural; but he adds that “ another Grammarian allows the form se
also in the genitive plural of the two pronouns idam and tad’”.* The sin. , . gular number “another Grammarian” is noteworthy. It cannot refer to —
Vararuchi; because the latter (VII, 11, 12) agrees'with Hemachandra in the distribution of the forms se and sim to the singular and plural respectively ; and moreover Vararuchi allows those forms only to the pronoun ¢ad, On ‘the other hand, Hemachandra’s remark exactly agrees with Chanda’s statement
in his sitra I, 17, that ‘the two pronouns ¢ad and. édam assume the form
se in the genitive of both the singular and plural”. The coincidence is too “striking to be merely accidental. Of course, this would leave it still an open
‘placed earlier than Hemachandra. It is true, that most of the additional ae | matter if © and D, is also found in Hemachandra’s Grammar, in some cases ^ expressed in the very same words. = प्फ the manner of its arrangement and wording seem clearly to show, that itis original in OC D, and that Hemachandra in writing his own grammar drew on the text of 6 D rather than that the latter rearranged and modified Hemachandra’s rules. Thus the wording of some rules in CD is very inaccurate, as compared with the corresponding rule in
* Idam-tador dmdpi se ddosam Kagohid ickohhati, त, 0. ILL, 81,
+ Ladidamoh se shashtht-riipdndm, Ch. I, 17. 2
' question, whether or not Hemachandra is prior to the Revisionists of Chanda. . “But on the whole, I have come to the conclusion, that the latter must be ` `
INTRODUCTION. 2111
प्तदणदवकाता० (compare, ©, g., Ch. II, 6a with H. 6. III, 14, 24). Some old ४ एन forms to which C D devote special rules (II, 182, 189) are subsumed -. by Hemachandya under another rule (पि. ©. IIT, 187).* Many peculiar forms, , mentioned by © D as belonging to the ordinary Prakrit, are referred by Hema~- । chandra to the Apabhramsa dialect (compare, e. g., Ch. IT, 271 with H. ©. IV, 444). All this is hardly likely to have been done by any one working with Hema- chandra’s grammar before his eyes; whereas it is natural that Hemachandra, ' having before him the text of © D and noticing its inaccuracies and inconsis- --tencies, should have set about remodelling and rearranging it.t The only evidence of any moment, which seems to make for the priority of Hema- chandra is the stitra I, 16, where the Revisionists have elided the छ while Hemachandra in his gerresponding sttra III, 8 ‘still preserves it. But the evidence on the other side seems to me much stronger, and I think ens it, therefore, more probable, that the text of C and D, so far at least
i as it is common to both, is older than Hemachandra. On the other
hand, ib can be demonstrated that the text of MS. D, with its peculiar
` additions of stitras II, la, 18, le, is later than Hemachandra. The corre-
sponding: stitras “in Hemachandra are I, 5, 6, 8. Two of them, indeed, viz., , J, 6 and I, 8, are, word for word, the same as Ch. II, la and J, 16. But it will be observed that in Hemachandra the order is reversed. 8५५६ II, 16
: in’ MS. D corresponds to H. C. I, 8, while II, le in MS. D corresponds to
HL. I, 6. That Hemachandra’s order is the correct one follows from the
१ fact, that the negative particle na “not”, which must be understood in 82
T, 8 in order to make it intelligible, is, according to a well-known practice of stitra-works, supplied from the preceding stitra I, 6. On the other hand in MS. D, the siitra II, 10, as ib is not preceded by any इद्धि containing the negative particle, remains simply unintelligible, unless, contrary to the _ well-established practice, the negative particle is supplied from the succeeding
oe , # It thay be noted that the omission of all mention of these old Prékrit forms in the
ध । text of the MS. A B makes for the antiquity of the latter. For it shows that in their time ; these forms were not “old” or obsolete, but fresh and living, and called for no special
remark. + Many other evidences for the priority of © and D with regard to Hemachandra
` will be noticed in the footnotes to the English translation. I will mention here only one. Supposing that Hemachandra knew the text of C and D, he could not help noticing the discrepancy between its siitras IIT, 34 and ITT, 12. What more natural than to accept
sutra III, 34, which was in conformity with the then state of the Prékrit language, as
tho principal rule, and subsume siitra ITI, 12 under it as an exception? Now this is,
what Hemachandra actually has done ;! (866 H. ©, I, 177 and compare the examplos). This,
» at all events, is a much more probable explanation of tho circumstances, than to suppose the reverse {0 have taken place, 866 also the footnote on p. xiv. :
XXIV INTRODUCTION.
siitra. This appears to me to be conclusive as to the priority of Hema. | ^ : chandra. It might be thought, at first sight, that the fact, that Hema. '
` chandra’s stitra IV, 353 is found in MS. ©, but not in MS. D, goes to prove — similarly that the text © also is later than Hemachandra. But I think it
exceedingly probable that the omission of that stitra in D is quite accidental,
perhaps even a mero error of the writer of my copy. For omitting from D
the stitvas IT, 1a, 18, le which are undoubtedly drawn from Hemachandra:_. I, 5, 6, 8, MS. D has only one stitra less than MS. ©, and as the text of the two.” , 7 | is otherwise nearly identical, it is more than probable that stitra I, 114 ought.” भ , to be supplied in D.* As rogards the relative age of Vararuchi and (तष, , ` the indications seem sufficiently marked to attempt a decision. The treatment ; a
of the ablative suffixes do and dw in Vr. प्र, 6 as comp ged with their treatment _ by the Revisionists in I, 16, makes it certain, that Vararuchi is earlier than _ the Revisionists, who possibly may have been guided by his grammar in
making their revisions of Chanda. The strange circumstance that the
Revisionists, though evidently men of the Jain community, yet, contrary to the’. . | practice of Jaina Prakvit, changed every dental m to cercbral 2, seems tobe...”
strongly confirmatory of an influence on them by the absolute rule (II, 42) ` of Vararuchi’s grammar. Hemachandra’s rules (1, 228, 229), undecided as they are, could not have influenced them. (See remarks on p. xxv). On the other hand the terms of Vr. II, 2 as compared with those of Ch. ITI, 34 in MSS. A and B, would seem to make it equally certain, that Vararuchi was later than Chanda. But as to whether he was acquainted with Chanda’s work, there is too little evidence to form an opinion. On the whole, I should think it improbable. ale x, phe Se HH
oe A SKETCH OF CHANDA’S GRAMMAR, व = > QOMPARED WITH THOSE oF VaRaRvonr ayy Hemacnanpna. 7 1, Vowets.
। । "The vowel. system does not materially differ from that of the ordinary
Prakrit. But many of the peculiarities of the latter do not yet show them. .
selves in the earlier Prékrit of Chanda. In common with the later, the old Prékrit does not possess the ' following Sanskrit vowels; 7é (II, 5), a¢ (II, 6), aw (II, 8) and the pro. oe tracted (pluta, II, 14). Nothing is said regarding r¢, dri, Ipd, but they seem. _ to be included in the term rvarnasya. (II, 5).
* A similar accidental omiggion of stitra I, 15 has occurred in the case of MS, B,
INTRODUCTION. XXV
Instead of rz, either the syllable +2 or any other vowel (a, 7, # e, 0) may be used, according to circumstances (II, 5).
Instead of at either ai or e, and instead of aw cither até or 0) may be used, according to circumstances (IT, 6-9) : but not 7, ¢ and w, as in later Prakrit.
With regard to the changes of those vowels which the old Prakrit possesses, there are the following two broad laws
1. A long vowel («, ¢, %) preceding a conjunct consonant is shortened (a, i, #), IT, 8. Hemachandra’s rule, H. C. I, 84, corresponds to this; Vararuchi has no corresponding rule, see Cowell, p. 185.
2. Lhe final vowel of the former part of a compound word is dropped, if the initial vowel of the latter part is followed by व conjunct consonant CII, 2);. 9. &. deva + indra would in Sanskrit be devendra, but in the Arsha the final @ of deva is elided, hence the compound is devinda.* There is nothing corresponding to this rule in either Vararuchi or Hemachandra; they apparently did not acknowledge it. But evidences of the change to which the rule refers are by no means uncommon, even in the later Jaina Prakrit ; thus in the Bhagavati occur geguvace-—=Sie-yoegopanegah appusye == Skr, alpotsukah, paduppanna = Sky. prati-utpanna, sattuttaram = Sky saptottaram, (see Weber's edition, pp. 386, 406, 408, 427).
On the other hand the later Prakrit changes of 2 to short ८ and of w to short ० (Vr. I, 12, 20. प्र, ©. I, 85, 116) are unknown to Chanda, Thus we have ginhati in Ch. ITI, 28 for genhai in त. C. IV, 209.
। For the rest, vowels are liable to a great variety of interchanges, and that, whether they occur in a single word (II, 4) or when they occur at the point of junction in a compound word or even at the point of contact of two words ina sentence (II, 1). It is this miscellany of changes, summed up by Chanda in two short rules (I, 1, 4), the separate enumeration of which in distinct rules has given rise to the great expansion of the chapter on vowels in the Grammars of Vararuchi and Hemachandra. It is quite possible, however, that a few of the interchanges, noted by the latter, did not yet obtain in the earlier Praékyit.
2, ConsoNANTS.
With regard to the Consonants, there are five points in which the older Prakrit of Chanda differs from its later forms, as exhibited in Vararuchi and Hemachandra.
1. The preservation of the dental 2, in every case, whether single or double, whether initial or medial in a word. This follows from svitra II, 14
* Hemachandra montions this very word in an Arsha sentence, devindo inam abbavt sec प, ¢, IIT, 162,
KXVI INTRODUCTION,
when compared with its revised terms in OC D If, 14, and from the uniform spelling of the Prakrit examples with 2 in MSS. A and B. Still in exceptional cases the change of # to % does occur in the older Prakrit (III, 16). But, the almost general rule of the latter is to follow the Sanskrit usage, to chango # to » only in those cases where the change would occur in Sanskrit under the influence of a preceding (eerebral) 7%, » 62 sk. The Prakrit of Vararuchi (II, 42) as well as the practice of the Revisionists exhibits the exact counterpart ; 22.) a uniform substitution of the cercbral 2 for the dental 2. Hemachandra’s Prékrit (the so-called Jaina Prakrit) exhibits a practice more approaching to that of Chanda; e7z., dental #2 may be preserved when double medial or single initial, but is changed to 2, when single medial (H. C, I, 228, 229). Still the difference is marked, and Hemachandra knew it; for he points it out himself.*
2. The preservation of the medial single surd unaspirate consonants, with the only exception of ¢ which may be elided. This follows from sitra III, 34 as compared with the terms of that stitrain C D III, 34. But ¢ was not unfrequently, and ¢ and p were exceptionally, softened to ¢, d, @ respec- tively (1II, 12). See also introductory remarks on pp. xiii, xiv. In the later Prakrit of Vararuchi (II, 2) the surd consonants are cliled, with the exception that ¢ is always (Vr. II, 20), and ¢ and p not unfrequentily (Vr. IT, 7. $, 6. IT, 15), softened to ¢, d, v respectively. The still later Prékrit of Hema.- chandra agrees with that of Vararuchi in every respect (H. C. I, 177, 195, 281), except that dental ¢ is now always elided (H. C. I, 209) ; its softening to व now only surviving in the Sauraseni and Mdgadhi{ dialects} (H 6, I; 209, IV, 260, 802). The three successive stages of phonetic decay can be clearly traced ; and this explains why the peculiarity of Saurasent and Magadhi in retaining the sonant dis not noticed by Chanda; it was simply because in his time no difference in this respect between those two dialects and the great Prékrit had declared itself. The fact seems to be, that the great Prikrit dialect decayed much faster, than the other two Prdkrit dialects; though the long lapse of years has now practically obliterated any difference. In the modern dialects all over North India, there is no appreciable difference in the treat. ment of d@; perhaps the only trace of the original tenacity of the Magadhi in retaining क being preserved in the past participial terminations 72 or वृ in Bangali, Oriya, Hastern Hindi and Marathi (the nearest representatives of the old Magadhi), which in all probability are the same as the Magadhi
* Arshe; dvandlam, anilo, analo; iti ddy api; i, c., in the drsha medial » is pro. served, as algo the initial». (प, ©. I, 228). ४
t I leave here aside the curious rule of Hemachandra with २60८८८८ to the Apa bhramga (H. O. TV, 396). It refors to an ancient kind of Apabhramsa, as I ghall show in the footnotes to the English Translation,
INTRODUCTION. XXVi termination 24 (Sanskrit ta); see the introductory remarks in my Com- parative Grammar, also 2044 §§ 109, 806, pp. 62, 189.
8. The preservation of the medial single surd aspirate consonants, with the only exeeption of ‰ which may be reduced to इ. But ¢ was not unfrequently, and the rest were exceptionally softened, to dh, ete, This has been shown in the introductory remarks pp, xili, xiv. In tho later Prikvit of Vararuchi, only ch is presarved, but 14 is always, and ph generally, softened to dh and bd respectively (Vr. IT, 2-4, 26), while 44 and th are always reduced. to h (Vr. II, 27). The still later Prakrit of Wemachandra agrees with that of Vararuchi in every respect (H.C. L1I, 187, 199), except that pk may now be either softened to 6h or (more usually) reduecd to 2 (H.C. 7, 286). Here again the softening of ¢2 to dh only survives in the Sauraseni and Mégadhi dialects (Vr. XIT, 3. H. C. IV, 267, 302). The phonetic parallelism between this and the preceding case will not fail to be observed.
4. The preservation of the single medial somi-consonants $ and ४, This follows from a comparison of stitra ILI, 34 with its terms as revised in © D ILI, 34. In the later Prakrit of Vararuchi and ILemachandra y was always and ® commonly elided (Vr. II, 2. H. ©. I, 177). In those cases where Hemachandra seems to have preserved y, it is really not the semi. consonant which has been retained, but the semivowel y (sce No. 5) which has been inserted.
5. The insertion of the semivowel y to fill up the hiatus whenever tho second vowel 18 ¢ (III, 35). This is the so-called ya-sruti, as it is named by Hemachandra (I, 180). According to him, however, both vowels must be a Vararuchi’s Prikrit knows nothing of this usage. It is not the peculiarity of any age or locality of Prdkrit, but the degree of its use or disuse marks the degree of the vernacular or artificial character of Prakrit. It is very observable in the less artificialized Jaina Praékrit.
In all other respects there 18 no difference between the older Prikrit and that of the later Grammarians.
The only consonants of the Sanskrit system which the former does not possess are the guttural ड #, the palatal अ % (11,14), the palatal ws and the cere- bral ष 59 (III, 18). Both Vararuchi (ष) 17) and Hemachandra (1, 30) allow the two nasals in conjunction with their own class. To Chanda this practice appears to have been not unknown, as stitra II, 15 would indirectly seem to show. However, there can be but little doubt, that this was only an orthographic, and not a phonetic question ; the class-nasal was probably always pronounced (just as it is now, in the modern Gandians), though it might be written in either way, by its own proper symbol or by the anusvdra. Nevertheless, though that is the theoretical rule of the grammars (even now), practically the elass- nasal is never written, but always the anusvara,
XXVIIL INTRODUCTION.
The other consonants of the Sanskrit system, which the old Prakrit possesses, are subject to the following laws :
a, Single Consonants.
1, Final consonants are cither dropped or changed to anusvara or pre- served by the addition of the vowel a (II, 11. ITI, 88). In Vararuchi and Hemachandra these cases are particularised in a number of soparato stitras (Vr. IV, 6-12. H. ©. I, 11—24).
2, Medial sonant unaspirate mute consonants are elided, (III, 34), though there are occasional exceptions (III, 30, C D II, 26).
8, Medial sonant aspirates are reduced to # (III, 18).
4, Initial ¢ is once (in gharam) said to become gh (III, 20).
5, [In those cases, where 7 has arisen from an original Sanskrit conjunct (jn), it becomes % (IIT, 19)].
6, ¢ sometimes changes to 7 (III, 21). Only one example (solasa) is given, but itis probably meant asa type of others. In later times, at all events, this change was not uncommon; sce © D III, 21. Vr. II, 23. H, ©. I, 202.
7, n changes to 2 in Paisdchi (ITI, 38).
8, Dental consonants (incl. ») exceptionally change to the corresponding cerebral (III, 16). [In those cases where they have arisen from an original Sanskrit conjunct (fy, dy, sth, etc.) they may change to the. corresponding palatal or cerebral (III, 16) ; once (in khambho) such a th becomes kh (IIT, 19)]
9, Once (in vammatho) m changes to ¢ (IIT, 21)
10, Initial y becomes ¢ (III, 15); except in the second personal pro- nominal base, where it becomes ¢ (III, 17). Medial y remains unchanged (see above, No. 4, p. xxvii) ; except in the passive where it is changed to 77 (III, 25), and in those cases in which itis vocalized to ¢ and combines with the adjacent vowels (III, 31). [In those cases where y has arisen from an original Sanskrit conjunct, it becomes j or, exceptionally, 7 (III, 15, 22)]. In éeraha it is apparently said to become r (III, 22); but the same wort/ is
+ ध “3 explained differently in III, 81.
11, * remains unchanged; excepting a few rare cases in which it is said to change to $ or z (ITI, 18, 20). These exceptions, however, can be explained differently. In the Paigdchi and Magadhi dialects it always changes to J (III, 88, 39)
12, » remains unchanged (see above, No. 4, p. xxvii), excepting those few cases of medial ¢, in which it is vocalized and combines with the adjacent vowels (III, 31). Once (in ruhkho) it is said to become r (III, 22)
) we ibe
कः
1.10 0010
INTRODUCTION. XX1X
18, s remains unchanged, excepting a few cases in which it becomes ¢ (III, 14). In Mdgadhi, however, it always changes to $ (III, 39). [In those cases where it has arisen from a Sanskrit 59 or conjunct consonant, it may change to &h or ehh or ¢ (III, 14)].
14, % remains ‘unchanged ; excepting one case (gharag) where it is said to become 2 (III, 19). [In those cases where it has arisen from an original Sanskrit conjunct (Ay, hv), it changes to jh or Oh (ILI, 20, 21)].
b, Conjunct Consonants.
In the treatment of these the older Prdkrit is altogether in accord with the later. They may be dealt with in two ways :— 1, either they may be dissolved by interposing some short vowel (a or zor wu), ITI, 30. 2, or they may be simplified by eliding one of them (III, 1—9) and doubling the other (ITI, 24, 27). As regards doubling, an aspirate is reduplicated by means of the
ae . corresponding unaspirate (III, 26); and it never takes place in the begin. ning of a word (III, 28), nor in a few exceptional cases (IIT, 29).
With regard to elision Chanda’s formal system much differs from that used in Vararuchi and Hemachandra, though the material result is the same. In the latter Grammarians most conjuncts are changed bodily to a single conso- nant (see Vr. III, 9—66. प्र. C. II, 1—115) ; but Chanda strictly carries out the theory of elision. For this purpose he arranges the consonants according to their degree of persistency, thus 7, y, ©) 2, h, class consonants (incl. nasals), sibilants. Here each consonant 1681808 those preceding it, but gives way to
, 0086 succeeding it. Thus 7 gives way under all circumstances (III, 9, exe.
in the Apabhramga IIT, 37); y gives way to ४ J, h, etc. (ITI, 1, 2, 3, 5), but not to 7; ०» gives way to ¢ (III, 2) or & (III, 1) or the class-consonants (IIT, 8, 5) or sibilants (III, 2), but not to r and y (III, 2,9); 7 gives way to the class-consonants (ILI, 3, 5) or sibilants (III, 2), but not to r, y, ©
(IIT, 2, 9) ; & gives way to the class-consonants (III, 3), but not to y andy
(III, 1); the class-consonants, including the nasals, give way to the sibilants
(III, 4, 6, 8), but not to + (III, 8, 5, 9) ory, », J (ILL, 8, 5) or & (ILI, 8) ;
lastly a sibilant gives way to no other consonant (III, 2, 4, 8), except toa succeeding single class-consonant or nasal (III, 3, 6 in sk, sp, shn, sn, sn,
sm, shm, ete.). This is his principle of elision. But his principle of arranging
the sitras is the order of the lettersin the alphabet. He commences with the last letter in the alphabet % (III, 1), then proceeds:to the sibilants and semi-consonants (III, 2) ; next he takes the class-consonants (III, 8—8) ; and lastly he gives the peculiar case of , whichis alwaysclided (III, 9). The six stitras, referring to the class-consonants, are arranged according to the
सर INTRODUCTION.
principle of the order of the elided letter in the conjunct. First Chanda gives two rules about cliding the first in the conjunct (ITI, 8, 4), then one rule about eliding the second in the conjunct (IIT, 5), lastly three rules about optionally eliding the first or the second (IIT, 6—8).
After the glision has been made and before the doubling takes place, the ‘remaining single consonants undergo some highly artificial changes. These have been already enumerated under the rules regarding the changes of single consonants where they are indicated by being placed within angular brackets. Here it only remains to add, that when the remaining single con- sonant happens to be a palatal or cerebral sibilant (s or sh), ib is ipso facto (i. e. by silent reference to III, 18) supposed to be changed to the dental s and treated ag such in regard to the needful change before doubling (see remarks on pp. ix, x). The reason of this will be at once understood, when it is recollected (see p. xxvii), that those two sibilants are the only consonants of the Sanskrit phonetic system (beside & 4 and जं %) which do not oxist in Prakrit. ।
It may be well to illustrate Chanda’s highly artificial system of treating conjuncts by a few examples, as Zukshind, krshnam, spashtam, sthitah, vidyd, jihed, véhyah, Here taxsumf first becomes Jakshy (by ITI, 6), then lashé (IIT, 4) or 145: (ITI, 18); next 0८442 (IIT, 14), finally lachchhi (TIT, 24, 26). Krsmyam becomes first krpam (III, 6) or kanam (II, 5), and thon kanham (111, 28). Spasmyam becomes first pashtam (III, 3) or pushtam (If, 4), then phushtum (III, 11, 28), finally phugam (III, 8); or pushtam may become putam (III, 8), then pugham (IIT, 11), finally put¢ham (III, 24, 26). शप्प् becomes first 202४4 (IIT, 3), then thitah (III, 16, 28), then thitao (II, 10), finally ¢hito (II, 1) Vupv first becomes vidé (III, 5), then wid (IIL, 16), finally ०4 (III, 24, 27). वाकार, becomes first jikd (IL, 1), then jibhd (IIT, 21), finally j2bbd (III, 24, 26). Valmxan becomes first véhah (III, 1), then vdjhak (III, 20), then vdjjhah (III, 24, 26), then vajjhah (II, 8); next vajjhao (II, 10), finally vajyho (II, 1).
1 will be now understood from the preceding remarks, why the division of the third chapter of Chanda’s Grammar into two parts, one (III, 1-9) on conjuncts, the other (III, 9—39) on single consonants, is such an im. portant, and even essential, feature of his grammatical arrangement, To ¦ abolish that division, as the Revisionists have done, is to destroy its sym-
| - metry and coherency.
3, ANUSVARA.
। | » „` The anusvéra is employed in as promiscuous a manner in the older Prékrit (II, 15, 11), as in the later (H. ©. I, 28—80. Vr. 1V, 12—17). It is not only used where it also occurs in Sanskrit; but somotimes it takes
fal
1
INTRODUCTION, XXX1
the place of an elided consonant, which may have been either the final of a word (II, 11) or the first part of a conjunct (IJ, 15); or again it may be added at the end of a word for the mere sake of euphony (II, 15).-
4, VISARGA,
The visarga in the older Prakrit, as in the later, is never tolerated (II, 10). It is either dropped altogether or changed into o or e or ». The change to o or © occurs, é. ¢»; in the nominative singular, that to r in punarapi (compare H. C. II, 179). ।
5, Nouns.
The older Prdkrit, like the later, has three genders, masculine, feminine and neuter (I, 2); but the gender is variable (I, 4). It has also like it, only two numbers, singular and plural, the latter being also used in the place of the Sanskrit dual (II, 12). It further has only six cases, the genitive being used, in the place of the dative (II, 13).* The six cases with their case-suffixes are the following, for masculine nouns :
| Nom. ०, ८ (1I, 10) or— (-- (I, 11) or zo (I, 12).
Acc. am (I, 8) ८ or — (I, 11, 15), no (I, 12)
-S | Intr. tga or nd (I, 8) re 4 # (him) (I, 7). र | Abl. 8, to, tu, hinto or no (I, 12, 16) A hinto (I, 8). 2 | Gen. ssa or no (I, 13) cE ha (nam, ham) (1, 5).
Loe. ©, mame (I, 14) su (sum) (I, 3).
NV. B.—The forms given after “or? belong to nouns in ¢ and w, the others are general, except those of the nom., instr., abl. singular and acc, plural and © of the loc. sing. which belong to nouns in a The sign (—) means absence of any suffix.
_ The vocative sing. and voc, plur. are nowhere noticed by Chanda, which may be explained in two ways, either that their forms were the same as in Sanskrit, or that they were the same as those of the old Prakrit nominative.
Feminine nouns add the same suffixes, except in the instr., abl, gen. and loc. sing., where they take the suffix e (I, 9), and in the nom. and ace. plural, where they take the suffixes o or # or no suffix (I, 10).
Neuter nouns also take the same suffixes, as the masculines, except in
the nom. and ace. plural, where they add the suffix ४ (I, 8).
NV. B.—Those suffixes which are used independently of the gender of the word Ohanda indicates by the term déngdt parasya (I, 7, 8), unless where the fact is otherwise obvious (as in I, 3, 5).
* It is one of the clumsy inconsistencies of the Revisionists of C D that they insert
the word sapta “seven” in the commentary to stitra I, 8, ` Chanda had very properly omitted it, as stitra IT, 13 shows that Prakrit has only six cases,
XXX1l INTRODUCTION.
In adding these suffixes, the final vowel of the base of the word may undergo the same changes of elision or sandhi as in Sanskrit (I, 3. II, 1), or it may be exchanged with other vowels (II, 4). Thus in the acc, sing. deva + am = devam (II, 1), aggt + am = aggim (II, 1, 4), dhenu + am = dhenum (II, 1, 4 see marginal gloss on p. 8); nom. sing. deva + 0 == devo (II, 1); deva + ¢ = deve (II, 1); inst. sg. deva + ina = devena (II, 1); buddhi + e = buddhie (II, 4) ; loc. sg. deva + e == deve (II, 1); nom. ace. plur. buddht + ० = buddhio (II, 4); inst. pl. deva + hi == devehd (TT, 4) ; loc. plur. deva + su = devesu (II, 4), etc. See also the additional remarks in the Analysis of Chanda’s nominal declension.
Prdkrit has only three declensions; viz. those ending in @ (or feminine é), £ and w (or feminine in? and ४). Nouns ending in £ or @ are generally declined like those in £ and w# (see, €. g., 1, 9), but masculines in ¢ and ४ are nowhere especially mentioned by Chanda. Nouns originally ending in a con- sonant either drop the final consonant or add a to it, so that they come under one of the three declensions in @ or 2 or w (see II, 11). Nouns originally ending in rz are nowhere noticed by Chanda, but they would probably come under one of the three declensions by the operation of the rule II, 5, by which 72 would change to ४ and, in some cases, to ara or dra, as in Pali and the later Prdkrit. There is one exceptional declension ; viz. that of the word go “cattle” (II, 16).
a, Declension in a.
The nom. sing. ends in 0 or e masc., ©, g., devo or deve; d fem., e. g., gangd ; am neut., e. g., kulam.
The ace. sing. ends in am 7028९, and neut., e. g., devam, kulam; dm fom., 6, g., gangdm.
The instr. sing. ends in ena masc. and neut., e. g., devena, kulena ; de fem., 6. g., gangde. | The abl. sing. ends in & or dito or déw or dhinto masc. and neut,, ¢. ¢., | devdé or devdto or devdtu or devdhinto, kuld, etc.; de fem., e. g., gangée To these forms may be added the abl. made with the suffix to ( = Sanskrit tah). It 28 not noticed by Chanda, because it is not technically a declensional form. For the same reason it is separately noticed by Kachchayana (II, 5, 1, p. 116). But its existence in the Arsha is guaranteed by its existence in Pali, and by its existence in the modified form ¢fo in the later Prakrit (H. © ` ITT, 8); also by the existence in the Arsha itself of the pronominal forms maitto, taitto (I, 24, 28)
The gen. sing. ends in assa mase. and neut., e. g., devassa. Curiously enough the genitive sing. of a-bases is nowhere noticed, unless it be indirectly । taught by stra I, 18, The latter was the opinion of the Revisionists; and
INTRODUCTION. XXXI11
it is possible that on that account they may have removed it from I, 8, . where one would naturally expect to find it mentioned by Chanda, Fem. de,
€, g., gangde. The loc. sing. ends in 6 or ammé masc. and neut., e. g., deve or devammt,
kule or kulammi; de fem., e. g., gangde.
The nom. plur. ends in क mase., €, g., devd; do or ai or d fem., 8. g., gangdo, gangéu, gangé ; neut. dni or dni, 6, g., kuldnd or huldnt.
The ace. plur. ends in @ masc., e. g. deve; do or dit or 4 60.) 6 g., gangdo, gangdi, gangd ; dni or dnt neut., 6, g., kuldni ov kuldnt.
The instr. plur, ends in ९४८ or ehim (II, 15) masc. and neut., 6, g., deveht, or devehim, kuleht oy kulehim ; dhi or chim fem., 9, g., gangdhi or gangihim.
The gen. एप, ends in dpa or dha or dnam or dham (II, 15); eg, devdna or devdha or devdnam or devdham, gangana, etc., huldna, ete.
The 10९, plur, ends in ese or eswm (II, 15) 0280, and neut., 8. g., devesw or devesum, kulesu ox kulesum ; dsu or dsum fem,, e. g., gangdsu or gangdswm.
In the following scheme I have added the corresponding Sanskrit, Péli and later Prékrit or Arddha-Magadhi forms for purposes of comparison.
Masculines in a.
Case. Sanskrit, Pali. Arsha, | Prakrit.* Sing. Nom. | देवः देवो 231 or देवे देवा or Sat Voce. | Yea ष्देटव षटेदेव ०इदेवो देदेवण० दद्व Ace. | ea aq aa aq देवेन देवेन देवेष देवेश (| देवात् देवा देवा देवा हि =. देवता aaa Abl.< | gaa: Saat Lite ध Sarat or ्वातु | देवाओआ or ग्वा = Sat or णसा | Saif ear Safar or देवाद्दि Gen. | देवस्य देवस्स देवस्स देवस्स | दवे aq देवे द्वे Loc. ० _ ag — देवम्दि or ofa =| cata ata Plur. Nom.}) _ a | देवाः देवा टवा देवा Voe,
* The forms in this column are from Hemachandra’s Grammar. .. . .¶† Arddha-Mégadhi; see त, 0, IV, 287,
XXX1V
Case. , Sanskrit. Ace, | देवान Insty.| 2a:
देवेभ्यः ध, |
Gen. |
Loc, | देवेष
| (095. Sanskrit. Sing. Nom. | गंगा Voc. | aia Ace, | sat _ ‘Enstr, गंगया । ADL. ed ` ^ | गगायाः Gen. Loe. | गंगायां Plur. Nom. || Voe. | गंगाः | Ace, |
: गंगाभिः
Abl. | aaa: gee गंगाना ` ७6०. 4 | ¦
‘Loo. | ary
* Or abl. = abl, mase,, exe, the forms in ¢ and di, see पत, ©, III, 126, 127,
INTRODUCTION. PAIL Arsha. देवे देवे
दवेभि or cafe | Safe or ofS दवेभि or डि Zafar
देवानं Zar or देवाण = Vary or न्ड zag देवेषु or °F
Feminines in 4.
* PAli, Argha. गंगा गंगा गंगे गंगा ox म॑मे गंग गंगां गंगाय मंगाए
(or loc. गंगां)
way गगा
गंगया Wars or wars
गंगाभि or गंगाडि | गंगादि or FS
data or गंगाडिि | गंगादिता
गंगानं गंगाणूः०" गंगाण — Wars or ग्ड amg | or °@
Prakrit. देवा or Sa देवि or दिं or of %
Safar or oar
देवाद्दिता or न्सुते. देवां or Savy Sarge or ण्ड
Sag or eG '
Prakrit. गंगा गंगा or गंगे
aa
WATE or °F or oy
गंगा
WHT or गंगा गंगाहि orof¥ oro ददि
wartSat or णसु
WATT or गगण
Wary or ग्ड
WATS or oF
‘*
INTRODUCTION. XXXV
Neuters in a.
Case. Sanskrit. { Pali. Arsha, Prakrit. Sing. Nom. |} ; कुलं कुलं कुलं कुलं
Ace. |
Voc. | कुल Fe कुल कल Plur. Nom.
४००. | [कुलानि | कुलानि or कल्ला | कुलानि or of | कुलाणि or owe or
Ace. न्दर
The remainder like masc. in a.
b, Declensions in £ and w.
These two are treated alike, mutatis mutandis ; thus :—
The nom, sing. ends in 7 and w; e. g., mase. aggi, guru; fom. buddhi, dhenu ; neut. daht, mahu.
The ace. sing. ends in im and um; e. g., 01880. aggim, gurum + fem. buddhim, dhenum ; neut. dahim, mahwn.
The instr. sing. ends in zd and und mase. and neut., 6, g., aggind, gurund and dahind, mahund ; ¢e and ue fem., 6, g., buddhie, dhenite.
The abl. sing. ends in 200 and wno mase, and neut., ©. g,, aggino, guruno and dahino, mahuno; ve and ४८ fem., e. g., buddhie, dhenie. There is also the quasi-abl. in ४0 and wto; 6. &. aggito, guruto, etc.
The gen. sing. ends in 200 or ४854 and ९१० or wssa 1228९. and neut., e. ह aggino or aggissa, guruno or gurussa and dahino or dahissa, mahuno or mahussa ; de and we fem., 6. g., buddhie, dhenie.
The loc. sing. ends in imm and wmmi masc. and neut., 6, g., aggimmt, gurummi and dahimmi, mahummi ; ve and éefem., e. g., buddhte, dhenie.
The nom. and acc. plur. end in ayo or ¢ or tno and avo or ४ or uno masce., €. £. aggayo or agg? or aggino, guravo or gurt or guruno ; ¢ or 0 or tu and % or to or ww fem., e. g., buddhe or buddhto or buddhiu, dhent or dhenio or dheniw. The neuter is not noticed; probably dnd and dni; 6. g., dahéini, machine ; or possibly like the masculine, कवं or dahino, mahi or mahtno. The masculine forms in ayo and avo are not especially noticed by Chanda, because they are too obviously the same as the Sanskrit forms in aya}, avah, and would come under his general rule I, 3. Their existence is guaranteed by the Pali on the one side, and the later Prékrit on the other. (Vararuchi V, 16 specially notes a nom. and acc. form in zo and do, which is the same as ayo and avo, with ay, av contracted to ¢ ४ respectively.)
XXXVI INTRODUCTION.
The instr. plur. ends in cht or shim, and wht or whim; e. g., mase aggihé or aggihim, guruhi or guruhim ; fem. buddhihi or buddhihim, dhenuhi or dhenuhim + neut. dahihi or dahihim, mahuht or mahuhim ^
The abl. पप, ends in thinto and uhinto; 6. g., mase. aggthinto, guru- hinto ; fem. buddhihinto, dhenuhinto; neut. dahthinto, mahuhinto.
The gen. plur. ends in éna or tha or dnam or tham, and dna or wha or . tinom or tham ; 6, g., mase. aggina or agginam or aggtha or aggtham, gurina or gurtinam or guriéha or guriham; fem. buddhina or buddhtha, 6९. dhenuina or dhenitha, ete.; neut. dahina or daktha, etc., mahitna or mahiha, ete.
The loc. plur. ends in ise or iswm and wsw or usum; masc. aggisu or ` ध aggisum, (0780 or gurusum; fem. buddhisu or buddhisum, dhenusw 0 |
dhenusum ; neut. dahisu or dahisum, mahusu or mahusum
To the voc. sing. and plur. the same remark applies as to the voo. of . the a-declension.
Unfortunately there is not a little untrustworthiness and inconsistency in the MSS., regarding this declension. Yet with a careful combination of all indications, it is not impossible to recognise its real circumstances. The main points are four
(1). In stitra I, 8 all MSS. make the termination of the nom. sing. of all nouns in £ and w, of whatever gender, to bevand # This is almost certainly false; for (a) even in the later Prdkrit of Vararuchi (V, 80) and
` Hemachandra (III, 25) the nom. sing. neuter ends in short 2 and w; and
(b) what is more important, ‘there is no sitra in Chanda’s grammar to account for the long ¢ and # of the nom. sing., as compared with the short 2 and ४ of the Sanskrit. I shall show afterwards in the Analysis of Chanda’s rules on nominal declension that Chanda enumerates in stitra I, 8 all those declensional forms which are like the corresponding Sanskrit forms (samskritavad vibhaktayah), excepting so far as they are modified by the general phonetic laws of the Prakrit. Now by ् II, 10 the visarga of the Sanskrit nominative singular termination <4 or uh is omitted, but there is no sitra anywhere in Chanda to enjoin the lengthening of the resultant short z or w Hence it is very probable, that in Chanda’s _ Prdkrit the nominative singular ended in z, and similarly in ४, But further, the probability is strongly confirmed. by a curious undesigned coincidence, In stitra IT, 5 there occurs the word rishi, the Prakrit form of which in all “MSS. is given as is? (mot és?) ; again in that very sitra II, 10 one example . 38 vati, as all MSS. read, for Skr. vritih* ; again in stitra II, 17 we have mati and gati, with all MSS. (exe. B). Thus the inconsistency of the Revisionists brings out the truth! Pali, which Chanda’s Prdkrit resembles in go many
* Not = भिद्य, patih, as.0 D have it, but =Sky, oitiz,
INTRODUCTION. XXXVI
ways, affords a further confirmation of the truth; for there the nom, sing. also ends in 2 and w (see Minayef, pp. 64, 66, 69). Accordingly I have restored the short ह and ¢ in the nom. sing. throughout,
(2). It is very similar with the instr., abl. and loc. plural. Here all MSS. read long ४ and # before the suffixes 7, hinto and su. But as Chanda has no stitra to enjoin the lengthening of ¢ and w, it is probable that in his Praékrit they were not long, as in the later Prdkrit, but short, as (optionally) in Pali (see Minayet zb7d., also Kuhn, pp. 79, 81, 82). The fact that Chanda places the forms of the instr. and loc, plural under sitra I, 3, which enumerates whatever in declension was like Sanskrit, tends in the same direction; and it is further curiously confirmed by his excluding the abl. plural from sitra ‘I, 8. Suppose, ©. g., that aggthi, aggthinto and aggtsu be correct forms ; if so, all three forms would have to be excluded from sttra I, 3, as they are all unlike Sanskrit on account of their long ¢; but let the forms be aggihz, aggihinto, aggisu, then only aggihinto is unlike Skr. agnibhyah, on account of hinto, and must be excluded from I, 8, whereas aggihz is like Skr. agnibhih
(hk being dropped by II, 10 and ए becoming % by III, 18) and aggisw like । ` „ Skr. agnishu (sh becoming s by III, 18); hence these two forms will come _under I, 8, This is precisely whtat we find Chanda to have actually done ; ` ^ it follows that his premises must have been what we have supposed them
to have been. Accordingly I have restored the short ¢ throughout in those three cases.* In confirmation of the above reasoning it should be noticed, that when-
ever the short z and w are really lengthened to ¢ and & in Chanda’s Prakrit, “«, a in the instr., abl. gen. and loc. singular and nom. and acc. plural of feminine nouns, the change is expressly enjoined by Chanda, by stitra II, 4, where he
gives the two examples buddhie, dhenie (not buddhie, dhenue).
(8). The acc. singular of feminine nouns in £ and ४, as well as of feminine nouns in &, has a long termination ; thus gangdm, naim, vahim.. The MSS., on the whole, are decisive on this point. For though C and D
read gangam in I, 8, B reads gangdém (A omits it); on the other hand C and
D read naim in I, 8 (A B omitit). This is the more noteworthy, as not only the later Prakrit, but even Pali (see Minayef, pp. 64, 67, 70) have the short
। _ termination, so that, if the long termination in Chanda were due to the
Revisionists, they would have acted contrary to their usual instincts of con- forming to the later Prdkrit; and this strongly makes for the genuineness of the long terminations. The fact, that Chanda enumerates them under
* Perhaps no great stress can be laid on the fact that in MS. D the short 7 and # occur three times; viz. buddhihim, guruhim in I, 3 and guruhinto in 8, They may bo |
mere clerical errors,
XXXVI INTRODUCTION.
stitra J, 8, makes in the same direction; for if they had been short, they
would have been too wnlike Sanskrit to be noticed in that sitra. Another. |
evidence in the same direction is the fact, that in 72 II, 16, where Chanda gives the declension of the noun gdv¢ “cow”, the two MSS. © D again read gdvim in the acc. sing. (A B omit it) ; this carries all the more weight, as it is again an undesigned coincidence, Lastly there is another striking evidence, in the personal pronouns, which also preserve the Sanskritic long termination in their acc. sing. tudm or tdm and mdm (see remarks, p. xlvi).
(4). All MSS. assign a locative singular in ¢ to the nouns in £ and wu; thus aggie, gurue. That this is false, and rests on a misconception by the Re- visionists of the intention of stitra I, 14, I shall show afterwards in the Analysis of Chanda’s rules on nominal declension. Accordingly I have omitted these spurious forms.
Masculines in 7.
Case. Sanskrit. Pali. 41813 8. Prakyit. Sing. Nom. efx: ्यग्गि ग्मि अगम Voc. | अन्ने ग्ग fiat seat or afin Ace. | श्यं च्यग्गिं afar wifi Instr. च्यधिना च्यग्गिना afar ` च्यश्गिणा an अग्गिना व्यग्रा fair ay श्मग्गिसम्मा or om | ——. quit Sar Abl. ध | ्षग्गित ष्यग्गिता अग्गित्ता afaa a lat — --- मीशा or BITS Gen. | ग्रः अग्गिना or ow | अग्गिणि or ew | aad or afar Loc. | SRT अग्गिसिं or ofte | यग्मिम्मि wa finrtig 2 waa BATA च्ग्गये Sats or मणि Plur.Nom oF — war wart च्यम ४०९. 7 fe ree — अग्गिणा व्यग्गिणा Ace, | SRT like nom. like nom. like nom. ora wfinfa or ण्ड afmate or of - -- Instr. | खअद्मिभिः | ।
( अग्गोभि or of% ——. ममी) दि or म
॥
Case. Sanskrit, Abl. | uf: | Gen. | खम्रोनां Loo. | ख्निषु
Case. Sanskrit.
Sing. Nom. | बद्धः 00 बद्धे Ace. af Instr.) बद्वा ‘) Abl. Sat: or Gen. ae Loe. | वद्या aa
दबी |
Plur. Nom.
| aay:
। 0९,
Ace. | बद्धः |
Oo" Tnstr. बुद्धिभिः | ` Adil बुदभ्यः Gen. दोना
INTRODUCTION. 0६1; Arsha. afarfa or of | afafeat व्यमि cr गदि | — WHT or oy ष्ममगोनं । Barts or oT afing afarg or णसु BING — Feminines in 2. Pali. Arsha. afe बुदि बि बसि Ww iN ate बद्धं बदधिया बदौर (abl. loc. also बद्धा, loc. , i] ^ दि # = gai, af, बुधा) wey yet बुदिया बौ or बद्धौख like nom. like nom, afefa or डि | afety or fe alfa or of — ateta or of | afafear watfa or ण्डि —— ब्ोणं or ow बद्धम # a भ वृद्धौ or ण्ड
+ 309, 0, IV, 300,
XXXIX Prakrit. SICA or ePat Bway or ow (4८८5४) #
|
BAIN or णसु
Prakrit. ast बृद्धि or aay gfe बहर or बद्दः aerator Fale
yet
ब॑डौष्या or FETs like nom,
walt or of? qatar or exar Fete or ot (deest)*
&
xl
INTRODUCTION.
Pali. Arsha, बधि afegy org wats ----
Neuters in ४.
Pali. द्धि
Aysha. ददि (acc. af)
दधौ or द्धौनि | दडौनि or ofa
The remainder, like masculines in ४,
Case. Sanskrit, Loc. | afeu ५ «ॐ. Case. Sanskrit. Sing. Nom. | रपि Plur. do. | aaa Case. ध Sing. Nom. | गुदः Voc. | गय iC Ace. | aw Instr. ITT गरोः Abl, # | ि ( Gen गराः 1 Loe. att Plur. Nom. गरवः Yoo. bs ;
Masculines in wv,
` Pali.
गुरुणा
TTA Or °न्दा गरुतो
६३
गुरुणो
TUE
were or oft गरबा
J
We
\ॐ
req J
Aygsha.
गर्ता ॐ
ग् रुणा गुर Tera गरवे
ॐ
TS ५
|गरुत v
॥
* Like HAA, see Minayef, p. 69,
Prakyit,
qarg or og
Prékrit.
afe or ate or ate | (voe. only दहि)
| awife or दरद्
or BSS
Prakyit, we qt or aq = गरस rs गरणा
TET
| गुरूष्दितो
TEM
गरूष्या or VST 9 -# `
। AUT
ww गरस
neta
गुरवे ord] THTor oy
गरुण 2
INTRODUCTION, xi
Case. Sanskrit. Pali. Aysha. Prakyrit. wate or of * Tae or णदं — Instr. | गर्निः , ¥ weft or ofe —_— गरूष्दि or ग्द we ५ | wate or नदि | गृरद्िता --- 491. | awe चि or नुत weft or ण्ड — गृरूदिदे or oat ; Ted or TeY गरूणं or TSY Gen, | गुरूणां qed = व । TSE or TRE deest} Loe. गरष । TRE ~ TEE or णसु Feminines in 2. Case. Sanskrit. - Pali, Arsha. Prakrit, पि ध ~ ~ Sing. कपण. | घेनः घेन aq ay Voc. | Sat चेन घेन ew or धे ६७ w ie) a Ace. | धेनुं धेनुं Ra au Instr. | धेन्वा Fur or घेषाद् en i Baw: or | धेनुया धेनूए ४ = † धषु or Hay hart + ~ ~ \ a \ ' ; Loc. | धेन्वा or WaT J ae Plur. Nom. घे धेन au Voe. | waar नृब्यो or घेनूख षेये or Sys Ace. धेनूः like nom, like nom. like nom, | 7 wate or of = wate or of? — ` , Instr. | षेनुभिः Saft ध a ूमि or ofe — wate or of ४ wat or of water =-= , & ण. | घेनभ्यः : । | i Bafa or of —— षेणददिते or नसत 0, „9 Rag or Ha sad or Fay Gen, । aaa Fai 4 { 7 xn 7 nn an n धनूं or HAS deest}
* Like ज्ञ तुद्धि, see Kuha, p, 82, t+ See H.C. LV, 300,
3111 INTRODUCTION.
Case. Sanskrit, Pali. -Arsha. Prakrit. Gas Gag or og ----- Loe aes { . > Was —— TUS or °य
Neuters in w.
Case. Sanskrit. Pali. 41818. Prakrit. Sing. Nom. | सधु मधु we (acc. सङ्खं) | WS or WS or सर | (voc, म). Plur. do. मधूनि ay or मधूनि arfa or ° महरि or wet or . | मद्द्.
The remainder, like masculines in w.
Masculine nouns in ¢ and @ are generally declined like those in 7 and ¢; excepting the nom. sing. which ends in ¢ or % respectively.*
Feminine nouns in ¢and % are declined like those in 2 and w, excepting, of course, that they have long ¢ and % wherever the latter have short 7 and u.
Feminines in 7.
Case. | Sanskrit, | एदा. 1 तन, । | एषम
"Sing. Nom. a a cn. ars Voc. | नदि ` | नदि | os 7 नह | क | et ay - a Ace. | नदीं नदिं or नदिय | ae . | नष । (छाप, Instr. | नदौभः नदौभि or "डि | नदेहि or "हि | नदंद्दि० ofe , ण. | नकैभ्यः नदौोभि or of | नदददितो नददितो or oer ८ Loc. | नेदौषु नदौमु ALT or o&% AEE or ALG । | ए.)
The remainder, as in feminines in 7.
Feminines in %, loyal
Case. Sanskrit. | एका, =| 47818. १.11 Sing. Nom. वधूः वधू | a3 = as | . १००. बधु . वधु | | वङ्क qs Acc, [au - ay a ag
.. * Thus néni I, 24, sas¢ IIT, 18, savvanne in C D IKI, 6,
INTRODUCTION. 1111
Case. Sanskrit. Pali. Arsha. । Prakrit, . Plur. Instr. वधूभिः वधूभि or of | वह्ृद्ि or ° वद्वि or दिं 411. | वधूभ्यः वधूभि or ofe | बद्कद्ितो वद्ृददिंता or "सुता Loe. । वधूषु वधूषु वहतु or णतु FRE or oF
The remainder, as in feminines in 4, a 1 5 ।
The declension of the noun go “ cow”.
a The declension of this noun is given in stitra IT, 16. It is not really an irregularly declined noun. The fact is, the Sanskrit word go is generis communis, The Vernaculars (Pali and Prdkrit), however, have formed separate words for the two genders; viz., gdvo masc. and gdué fem. The declension of the latter is given in II, 16, and it is quite regular, like that of nad “ yiver’’,
Case. | Sanskrit. | Pali. Arsha, Prakrit.
` Sing. Nom. | (जैः ) गावौ+ गावौ aay or गाद Ace. | (at) | गाविं गावी ' | गाङ् गावियो# मागौख्यो or ow | गाकौच्रो or are sit Plur. Nom. (गावः) or TES Acc. amay* aay गाश
The remainder, like feminines in 7. |
6, PRONOUNS.
a, Personal Pronouns.
। The original forms of the base of this pronoun are स and | (= Sans- . kyit sq), of which, in Sanskrit, the former belongs to the singular and oo the latter to the plural, In the Vernaculars (Pali, Prakrit), however, this 11; ` ' distinetion. is not strictly observed. Moreover there are some by-forms of the base; viz., mama, mayha, maha, majjha, The last two, which occur in the Arsha, are, probably, mere modifications of mayha which occurs in Pali
* Gévt nom, sing. in Kuhn, p. 85, and gdviyo nom. एप्प, in Childers, p. 145, and gdvt in Kachch. I, 1, 23 (Senart, p. 44). + 64८ in HL त, II, 174 and pdf in HL C, 1 168 and 04४४ in H. त, Uy, 174,
xliv INTRODUCTION.
and, in the form mahya, in Sanskrit. In the Arsha these by-forms occur only in a few isolated cases ; but in the later Prdkrit they have a nearly regular declension.
The Arsha, also, has an indeclinable form bhe, which may be used for any of the six cases (II, 27). Hemachandra (III, 106) allows it only in the ace, plural. It is probably a modification of mhe, curtailed from amhe.
क, Declension. Cases. (Sanskrit. (Pali, Arsha, Prakrit. त ag ay ae | ay or Hee Sing. Nom. cane (> ---- म्हि or म्पि | ai a सा मं Ace. ees ad a ममं or Taz, ete. ie सया मण + Instr, |+ —— — a a or fa q = —- ——— Way, etc. (| मया aa मद्त्तो Sot tees = |ममन्तो or HATS, ete. Abl. jaa 7 | mt, 2 ieee ye Re i. | 2 | --- . ` — `. [मदत्तो0"मदादो,6४०. --- ` |- `. . | मजभक्तो or मल्भाद्), श ४ -| rar, (ete, (मे a | a a, ete. । समम मम or मसं सम | सम Gen. अ sess सद aw or HY | _— we Raw ASH or Ws ( == ae — are or GA cate afa afa az, etc. | om ee —. ममम्मि Loc. a ee ee मदसि — |- सञ्भाग्पर
— - ~ चन्दमधि
INTRODUCTION. xly
Case. Sanskrit. Pal. Avsha, Prakrit. : वयं । वयं वयं . एप, Nom. | 4 क ae are rg or चन्दो OF WS Gat we (or सम्दाकं) | GR Bry or न्दो or WY 4 नः नो नो णे ्छन्देद्ि or ofS Instr. | aarti: gata or fe | wef or ० दिं grits or ° डि, etc, (| अन्देभि or of च्यन्दद्दिंतो or (mei eat?) or °सुंतो | — are. Peat arreat or संतो 411. | स्मत् र | — — (ममेदिंतो?) or eat (| -- — समाद्दितो or ण्मुतो ("नः नो नो णो or णे अस्माकं अस्माकं or GTA | GATT or °ण BT or ए — — Bary or चद Srey Gen. — — — HAT or ण्ण — --- — werd or oW nee aaa न सङ्भाणं or oW ( ए ue ae He or GR (BRS Grey ष्यन्देसु 0" od च्यन्देसु or VET — — — HAG or WAG 106. — — — Wey or UG —— — — AsRG 0" TINT ; — — ---- also QTE or OG,
[etc. b, Second Personal Pronoun.
The original bases of this pronoun are 00 or ta and tumha (Sanskrit yushma). In Sanskrit they belong to the singular and plural respec- tively ; but in the Vernaculars (Péli and Prékrit) the distinction is not strictly observed, There are, moreover, the following by-forms of the base :
xlvi INTRODUCTION.
tu or tava or tuva or tuma and tuyha or tuha or tujjha or tubbha or twmbha. The first four are probably modifications of fva, and the others, of twmha. The Arsha possesses most of these by-forms, though they. occur only in isolated cases; absent are only tu, tuva, twyha. In the later Prdkrit, however, they are capable of almost regular declension.
The Arsha possesses also an indeclinable form dhe which may be used in any of the six caseg (II, 26). Hemachandra confines its use to the instrumental singular and to the nominative, accusative, instrumental and genitive plural (H. C. ITT, 94, 91, 98, 95, 100).
The second personal pronoun in Chanda’s Prakrit is especially deserving of notice, as some of its forms bear a striking witness to its antiquity, I mean the forms of the nom. acc. and loc. sing., which, just as in Pali, may optionally preserve the initial conjunct #v. The MSS. are on this point in considerable confusion, owing to the, perhaps, natural mistake of the Revisionists, that these were the Sanskrit equivalents of the Prdkrit forms. This can be very clearly shown in regard to the accusative case. The readings are the following :
A atiati ai
Bai ari तं) ai
C ati ati a1 at
Dati aati a A has nearly preserved the original reading, as I shall presently show, The Revisionists, mistaking: fodm and mdm for Sanskrit, were naturally surprised to miss in A the corresponding form सं ; so they quietly added मं in
B and ©. Next noticing that these four forms did not observe their proper |’ र
order, they change the latter to tudm, tam, mdm, mam in D. This no doubt ' ` , 38 the correct order ; provided that tvdm aad mdm are really Sanskrit.* But , | the truth is that they are not Sanskrit. Indeed, one of the indications that |
. they are not Sanskrit, is the very fact of the absence of that order in A B ©, ` On the other hand, on the supposition that they are not Sanskrit, but Prakrit, “it will at once appear that the reading of A does observe the proper order ; moreover it will also be seen, why A omits mam. The order of the forms. of the nom. plural (vayam, tuhme, ahme) clearly shows Chanda’s method.
Payam is a tatsama ; tuhme and ahme are tadbhavas; the tatsama form ठता | , :
_ responding to vayam is yéyam, but that does not exist in Prdékrit. Chanda’s ` ‘mnethod, evidently, is to give firstly the tatsama forms, afterwards the
tadbhava. Applying this key to the explanation of accusative singular forms, = , , aa * It is well known, that native Grammarians, when treating of “persons” or 0 ^ personal” pronouns do not commence, as we do, with the first person and then proceed’ / to the second and third; but thoy begin at the other end. Hence with thom the second | ६१ personal pronoun always precedes the first. Hence the change in D to tvdm tam, indi mam, `"
INTRODUCTION, अ [४11
we find that fodm, mdm is the tatsama pair; the tadbhava pair should be tém, mdm, but mam is not a tadbhava; hence it is omitted in the second pair,
; : > and the result is tedm, mdm, tém. That tdm 11080 be the genuine reading os 4g sufficiently clear from the above argument; if ¢am were the genuine
reading, the omission of the corresponding form mam would be unaccountable ; _ while if ¢ém was the original reading, its change into tam by the first Revi- ., sioniss can be easily accounted for by his taking todm for Sanskrit and tém for (what it undoubtedly would be in that case) an erroneous Prakrit spelling. But if ¢odm is a Prakrit tatsama, its immediate tadbhava is tém, not tam. And there is this to be said for the form ¢dm, that it agrees with the general law of Chanda’s Prakrit, of preserving the long termination in the acc. singular (see the remarks on p. xxxvii). Moreover if tam were the real form, it could hardly have been noticed by Chanda under stitra 7, 8, ag it would be too unlike Sanskrit tudm to be fairly called a samskritavad vibhaktt. It would, no doubt, have had a special sitra assigned to it; as indeed is done by the Revisionist authors of © D (in I, 20) who seem to have felt a little the inconsistency of their changing ¢ém into tam. It being thus . established, that ¢odm is the tatsama form of the ace. singular, there is little
" difficulty in adjusting the forms of the nom. and loc. singular, The tatsama forms of the former are tvam, aham; the tadbhava is fam, which is not mentioned in stitra I, 8, but occurs incidentally in other siitras (6. g. in II, 18). The tatsama locatives are tuayt, mayz; the tadbhava is tayi. There are, of course, no tadbhava forms of akam and mayi.
° Declension. '' ५66. Sanskrit. | ए]. Arsha, Prakrit. a a @ or तं ad org Nom. |4 —— qa qa तुवं or qa न ल= —a aqz (at a or तं wat or तां aor Ff —~ aa or तुवं qa तुवं or तुमं : Ace. ( [सस ares as ge — — तुर तवर or तुमे । ल्या war or तया | AL or aE तए or तद्र 1" |-- |- ते or qa ते or तुमे
ay, — त॒मरए or Gay
+ [४111 INTRODUCTION.
Case. Sanskrit. | Pali. Arsha, Prakrit. aT or TAT तदूत्तो तद्न्नो — तुमातो gar or gare — qatar or of | तुमाद्दिंतो or णि | mes = त॒ वन्नोणतुकाश्यो,6(५. 4.1. | तत् — ---- तुदन्तो ०1तुदाश्चो,8॥५. = — तन्भत्तोणतुन्भाश्यो,५6 eee 3 व॒म्दन्नो 0तुन्दाश्यौ ete. | [ete. — — तुक्भत्तो or तुज्ज | (ते ते ते @ ore orfe or Cort | तव aq aa तुव or तुम, etc. ere ee az | ge or तुं Gen. |4 —— — qa तभ or TH | — qe a" तुम्द 0 VR or GE fe or sa | ल्यि०वधि | लधि ० तयि | aor तुमि, ०४५. — — — qaorqafaorgqata ,. re — — 7 म्म Loc. १. —— — — तुञ्जम्मि व — — gta — — ग gata (| am तुम्दे or GR तुन्दे or तुम्द | , | === पः qe or See Plur. Nom. | यूय 4 . | = — gai
INTRODUCTION, xlix
Case. Sanskrit. Pali. Arsha, Prakrit. (a ` ay चो चो . | | a (or तन्हाकं) | gre a Ace, |< Bary — qa तुम्मे or तुन्भ 2. 1. 2 L (| —- ast (| greta or ण्डि | तु्दे or ofe Aare or ere $ | ख्माभिः a COSI OF ल) | RR or उनि | ४ lee | पौ = Gee ददि or wef (| — — तुज्भेदिं 6 वुम्देभि or of. | तुन्देर्दितो | व वम्दाद्दितो or °सुंतो Abl. | यमत् ---- त) तुम्मे° or Fatt, ate, 3 | apa a= तु र्द ०0" qwro* ete | soca =e | SONG Bay ०,९॥९. (वः वौ वो वो | | ( ( | Gare or oq ok | | Grr | Gen | माकं | aera eres 4 eae | | । gare or न्ड) | तुमाणंण्तुवाणं००ण् | | तुन्भाणं or ow | | ( | तुच्जाखं or ow हि | 7 as or qe 1 U a —a । तुन्प्र or qa
‹ । तुभ or तुभ
* Also SPST or ODA, उम्दाद्िता or "सुतो, TT GAT or "सुता, Weer far or °सुःता।
1 INTRODUCTION.
Case, ] Sanskrit. PAli. Arsha. Prélo it. ( | as । तन्देु or od GST or Gag* । ब प तमेष or तुसु भभ ---- तु वेषु or GIy Loe. was _ — — Ges or GUS ग GT or Ga प — तुज्भेसु or FHA ` wine pean त॒
b, Demonstrative Pronouns.
These are tad, etad and idam. Their declensional bases are ta, eta and ima respectively. They are regularly declined, like nouns in a Of the regular forms of fad the following are mentioned by Chanda, nom. sing. neuter tam (II, 17) ; nom. plur. mase. ४८ (I, 31) ; instr., abl., gen., loc. sing. fem, 149 (I, 9); gen. plur. com. gen. fénam or téham (I, 5), Moreover the following irregular forms are noticed; nom. sing. mase. sa (II, 17, Skr sa), fem. sé (II, 1, Skr. sd); abl. sing. fem. 20554 (BC D, I, 8, Skr. tasydh), ` gen. sing. or plur. com. gen. se (I, 17); gen. plur. mase. or neut. tesam
: । (Skr. teshdm) or tesim (1, 8); loc, sing, masc. or neut. tasmig (Skr. tasmin) or
tamhi (B © 7, 1, 8). All these anomalous forms are relics from the Sanskrit excepting the genitive se. They also occur in Pali, excepting the genitive
general se and the genitive plural tesim (see Minayef’s Pali Grammar, pp. 3—85). There are also evidences of the existence of an irregular feminine +
base 2४ or td; vig., instr., abl., gen., 106. sing. ६४८ (I, 9) and abl. sing. ४1554 (B CD, 7 8)
Of the base eta, the only forms noticed are the Sanskritic nom. sing mase. esa (II, 10) and the anomalous gen. general se (I, 17) | Of the base zma, only the regular form द of the nom. sing. fem, (IT, 1) and the anomalous form se of the genitive general (I, 17) are mentioned.
© Relative and Interrogative Pronouns.
The bases are ja and ka, which are declined regularly, like nouns in a. There are,only three forms, however, noticed in Chanda; vzz., the irregular ` Sanskritic abl. sing. masc. or neut. jamhd (III, 28) of the relative pronoun
* Also GIT, AAS, GUT, QUIS, CHANT, FANG; also overy form with final रदु,
a ह । a YF : 1
INTRODUCTION, li
and the irregular Sanskritic nom. singular neuter “im (I, 23) and the regular gen. plural kdnam or kaham (II, 15) of the interrogative pronoun.
d, Pronominal Adjectives.
The pronouns of quantity are क “so much”, jdva “as much” (II, 21), for Sanskrit ¢évat, ydvat, throwing off, as usual (see II, 11) the final con.- sonant ¢. Besides ¢dva there also occurs the anomalously shortened form td (but not 4, for jdva). The Pali has only édva, 7424 but not td (see Childers, pp. 500, 599). The later Prdkrit has both pairs complete, ४4६४ and jdva, td and jd (H. 0.1, 271). Pali has also a form jévam (apparently really a nom. sing., like maham, bhavam); the Arsha probably had both tévam and jévam ; at least they occur in the Jaina Pradkrit of the Bhagavati (see Weber’s Fragment, p. 257).
There is also mentioned the interrogative pronominal adjective, nom. sing. 10380.) katare “ which of two” (II, 10, Skr. Latarah), ;
7, Numenats.
The declension of the numerals is not noticed at all by Chanda, with the exception of the genitive plural, which ends in pham (I, 6). From this fact, however, it may be concluded, that, in all other respects, the declension of numerals was regular and followed that of nouns. That is to say, that cha “one”, pancha “five”, and all others, ending in a, were declined like nouns ina (8. g., deva); di “two” (Skr. dvi) and ¢i “three” (Sky. ४); like nouns in £ (6. g., aggi) ; and chatu ^^ four” (Skr. chatur), like nouns in # (6, g., guru). Itis probable, however, that the nominative and accusative of the second and fourth numerals were taken directly from the Sanskrit ;
_ viz., do or duve or ve (Skr. dvau, dve, P&li dve, duve, Prékyit do, duve, ve, ` donnt, venni) “two” ; chattdro (ace. also chaturo), chatasso, chattdrt (so also
in Péli; Skr. chatedrah, chaturah, chatasrah, chatvdri; Prdk. ehattiro, chatiro, chattéri) “four”.
The following cardinal numerals are mentioned incidentally : 6. chha (IIT, 14), Skr. shat, Pa. chha, Prak. chha.
10. daha (IIT, 14), Sky. dasa, Pd. dasa, Py. dasa or daha.
13. teraha (IIT, 22, 81) Skr. trayodasa, Pa. teraha or telaha, Pr. teraha. 16. solasa (III, 21), Skr. shodasa, PA. solasa, Pr. solaha (?)
20. vtsd (III, 82), Skr. vimsati, 8. vésati or vdsam, Pr. o¢sd. ”
80. ६४६४ (I, 6), Skr. trimsat, PA. timsati or tésam, Py. tisd.
50. pannd (III, 82), Skr. panchdsat, PA. patiidsam, Py. panndsd.
55. panapannasa (III, 38), Skr. panchapanchdsat, Pa. punchapaiiidsa,
Py. panavannd, ‘The following numerals are also mentioned, viz. :— -
hit INTRODUCTION.
6th chhattho (III, 26), Skr. shashthak, 28. chhattho or sattho (Kacheh.
ए. 200), Pr. chhattho. “6 fold” chhakkam (III, 3), Skr. shatham, PA. chhakkam, Py. chhakkam.
8, Tun Vers.
Chanda’s Grammar takes no formal notice of the conjugation of the Verb. Ineidentally, however, not a little information is supplied; and that shows that, on the whole, the conjugation did not differ much from its Sanskrit prototype, so far at least as the ordinary tenses are concerned. The difference does not appear to have been greater than that between the Pali and Sanskrit.
The old Prdkrit, like the P4li and Sanskrit, had parasmaipada and dtmanepada forms ; thus parasm. gachchhati “he goes” (II, 4) ; dtm. क्ट “it is known’’ (III, 25). These two examples also show the existence of the active and passive voices. The MSS. vary a good deal in their spelling (see the var. lect.) + sometimes all give the ending e of the 4tmanepada (6, g., vijjhate in ITI, 11); sometimes only one or the other (e. g., disate in II, 5, najjate in IIT, 25), while the rest give the termination z of the parasmaipada, I have preferred restoring uniformly the dtmanepada ending, as it has undoubtedly the support of antiquity and because Chanda has no siitra to allow for the change of the dtmanepada into the parasmaipada. That change became almost universal in later Prékrit ; its beginnings are already to be found in
Pali (Kachch. III, 4, 87. p. 268); and it may have occasionally occurred in
the Arsha; it certainly did ocour in the Arsha in the present participle, where it is enjoined by an especial siitra (II, 25); but the absence of any
_ such siitra with reference to the tenses seems to show that the change did not yet affect the latter.
There was no dual, as sitra II, 12 shows. The examples are all taken
- from the noun ; but if the noun had no dual, the verb is not likely to have
had it.
With regard to the three persons, examples occur of all three, both in the singular and plural ; but only in the present and imperative tenses. Thus present tense 187 sing. bhandme (I, 20. 22), vemme (III, 8) ; 2nd sing. sz “ thou
`. 8? (II, 18); 8rd sing. edi (I, 12), achehhaté (II, 1), guchehhati (II, 4. 10),
` ऋ (II, 22), hoté (III, 81), havati (III, 89); 1st plur. 2104700 (II, 27);
ord plur. jalanti (I, 12). Again imperative tense, 2nd sing. passa “ see thou”
(I, 12), 8rd sing. rakkhatu (I, 3), 2nd plur. nisdmetha (II, 26), 8rd एप्प,
rakkhantu (I, 4). These examples also show traces of the existence of verbal classes. Thus
bhavati, jalanti (Skx. .jvalanti), etc, are of the Ist class; efi, bhdti, vemmé «
fhe
cS
INTRODUCTION, 1111
(Skr. 20102) of the IInd class ; lajjante (Skr. ४6) is of the IVth class ; nisdmetha (Sky. nisdmayata) of the Xth class.
The passive may be formed in two ways, either by assimilating the suffix ya to the preceding consonant, or by changing it to jja if proceded by a vowel, or to izja if preceded by a consonant (III, 25). Thus 3rd sing. pres. disate for Skr. drisyate “it is seen” (II, 5), dajjhate for Skr. dahyate “it is burnt” (III, 1) ; again najjate for Skr. jadyate “it is known” (III, 25), vdhijjate for Skr. oddhyate “ he is troubled’’ (III, 25).*
The causal is formed by means of the suffix © as in the 2nd plur. imper. nisdmetha for Skr. nisdmnayata,
As to the participles, see the following section.
Conjugation of bhan “ speak”.
Present tense.
Person. Sanskrit. । Paéli. Arsha. Prakrit. Sing. Ist | भणामि भणामि भणामि भणासि or wufa 2nd | भणसि भणसि भणसि भणसि 8rd | भणति भणति ` wuts । WUE भणापो or WAY Plur, Ist | भणामः भणाम भणामो भणणम or WA, etc, Qnd | भणएय भणथ HUY भण or भणित्य 814 | भणंति भणति भणंति भणति. । Imperative. Sing. 2nd | भेण भण भण भण 814 भणतु भणतु भणतु भण Plur, 2nd | भणत भणथय भणथय aug 8rd HUA avg aug ४ भणतु Passive. (\ भद्यते waa (| Wat 0" WaT ; x | Sing, 8rd | wwe | भणयते भणौखरए or oy . | भणिच्जते (| भणिष्जिए or °ज्नदू
# MS. A in IT, 25 has the curious reading séhiyyantam (see Appendix), which raises a doubt, whether yy may not possibly be the correct reading throughout for 7; the lattor being due to the Revisionists. The reading yy would well agree with sitra III, 265 (nayyate, odhiyyate) ; though, no doubt, sttra III, 16 may account for the change of yy to jy.
liv INTRODUCTION.
Causal. Person. Sanskrit. | 7811, Arsha. Prékrit, भाणेति भाषति WUT प Sing. 510 | atwafa =n a . भणापति (भणापति?) WUT
The following specialities may be noticed: the root hava “ be” may be optionally contracted to ho; 9. g., hoti “it is” (III, 81); so also in Pali (see Minayef, p. 118). Again the root as “ be” drops its initial a in the 2nd pers. sing. si “thou art” (II, 18). The roots grah “take” and har “do” pass from the [Xth and Vth classes respectively into the VIth class, ginhaté “he takes” (IIT, 23), £araté “ he does” (see App. 8 © D, III, 3).
9, SUFFIXEs. a, Participial.
a, anta (इद्र, at) forms the participle-present of the parasmaipada verbs and optionally of the 4imanepada. Thus arahanto (II, 11) for Skr. arhan ; pass. bhijgantam (II, 25) for Skr. bhidyamdnam.
b, mdna forms optionally the participle present of the 4tmanepada verbs ; e. g., séhigjamdnam (App. A, II, 25) for Skr. sddhyamdnam. `
gy ‘ta: forms the participle past of the passive; ©, g., katam (Skr. krtam, I, 28), sutam (Skr. srutam, III, 2), paldtam (Skr. paldyitam, I, 28), etc. After consonants it inserts £ or is assimilated : thus osaritam (Skr, apasaritam, II, 28), dittham (Sky. drishtam, I, 27).
त, tavva (Skr. tavyc) forms the participle future passive. Thus sofavvam (Sky. srotavyam, ITI, 2), kdtavvam (Sky. hartavyam, II, 4. ITI, 9, 29).
e, tté or téw (Skr. tvd) form the conjunctive participle. Thus dhottum (Skr. bhukivd, II, 19, final anusvdra by II, 15), or, with connecting vowel 4, vandittd and vandittu (Skr. vandited, II, 19). Sometimes tvd forms chehd and tu by assimilation ’s ९. &. suchchd (Sky. srutvd, II, 19); kattu (Sky. , kertod, IY, 19) ; or even ppi, as in kappi (Skr. krtvd, IL, 19, ef. gappi of gam
‘in the Apabhramga, प, C. LV, 442), :
. f, o (or rather to) may form the conjunctive participle; e. g., vandio ` (Skr. vanditud, IT, 19).*
* TI suspect that there is here some corruption in the text. The suffix is perhaps iya (asin Pali). MIS. A reads the example vandiva (not vandio) ; similarly A reads iva in I, 28, where undoubtedly the correct reading is ya. Hence the correct roading in IT, 19 may be vandiya, and accordingly the suffix iya (not 0),
INTRODUCTION. lv
g, tuna or ttina (Sky. tvdna) forms the conjunctive participle; 6. g., bhottina (Sky. bhuktud, II, 19), (ठ (Sky. krtod, II, 5).
b, Nominal. dla and il/a derive nouns expressive of possession. Thus jaddélo or jadiéllo (Skr. jatavdn) II, 20.
10, InpEcLiInaBLEs.
a, 24, cheya or chiya (Sky. eva) express emphasis (If, 17). After short vowels ch is doubled; thus fam cheya, but sa chehiya.
b, piva, viva, viya, voa, va (Skr. 2४४) express likeness (IT, 22) ; thus gimho viya, kamalam viva ; but piva apparently cannot be used after a vowel, but only after an anusviara, e. g., chandanam piva (cf. pz). The Sanskrit form iva also occurs, 6, g., chamarane iva.
¢, jahd (Skr. yathd) also expresses likeness (II, 22); ©, g., gahd sankho.
d, pt (Skr. apz) expresses addition or emphasis (II, 18), thus hatam pi, Suro pt.
e, khu (Sky. khalu) expresses emphasis (IT, 24) ; thus evam khu
f, ४4 or tdéva (Sky. tdvat) and jdva (Sky. ydvat) express measure (II 21); eg., té vichehhinnam, tdva gambhird, jdva lijjante, The abbreviated form ja does not occur. See pronominal adjectives, p. li
` &, dya (अप, श) indicates a quotation (II, 28) ; 8, g., cya evam,
h, o (Sky. ava or apa) is a prefix (II, 28) ; 6, g., ohasitum (Sky. avahasi-
tam), osarvtam (Skr. apasaritam).
ANALYSIS OF CHANDA’S SUTRAS
On Nomryat Ducrenston, I, 8. 5-10.*
The plan on which these stitras are arranged is to notice erst all those declensional forms which are like the corresponding forms in Sanskrit, though modified in accordance with the general phonetic laws of Prdkrit. These
` forms are enumerated in sitra I, 3
Secondly, all those forms which are peculiar to Prakrit and are not
५ merely phonetically modified Sanskritic forms are enumerated in the sittras ‘I, 5—16
The following table will show at a glance this cardinal division of the
~ Prékrit declensional forms
* A brief analysis of the second and third chapters of Chanda has already been given; see pp. vili—x, xxiy—xxxi
lyi INTRODUCTION.
Ua @ bases. masce. 2, ‰ bases, ; a, ४ w bases,
Sansk. Prak. Sansk. Prak. Sansk. Prék.
Sing. Nom. _—— Nom. Nom. Ace. — Ace. Ace. Instr. — Instr. ----- Instr. — ABL. — Abl. — Abl.
635 Instr, 2 | 7672९. + ABL. | —~ | 427. | —~-| 4ढ7 तक. $ | 0९०. द | कता. | Gen. कर. GEN. ¥ |
ee
The forms in the Sanskrit columns are those which Praékrit shares with the Sanskrit ; those in the Prakrit columns are the forms peculiar to Prakrit.
Now it will be observed (1) that in the Prakrit columns the only forms which are wholly alike for all three kinds of bases (in ¢, 7,) and for all three genders are those of the instrumental, ablative and genitive plural; in- dicated by capital italics. ।
(2). ‘The only forms which are wholly alike for all three kinds of bases in the feminine gender are those of the instr., abl., gen., loc, singular and the nom. ace. plural indicated by small italics. (In the other genders, the same forms are not alike for the three kinds of bases.)
(8). The only forms, which are wholly alike for the bases in £ and % in the masculine gender are those of the abl. sing. and nom. and ace. plural; indicated by ordinary type. | । |
_ (4). The only forms which are partially alike for all three kinds of bases in the masculine gender are those of the genitive and locative singular; = ` indicated by small capitals. (In the gen, sing. the suffix ssa, and in the 2
INTRODUCTION. 111
loc. sing. the suffix mm, are common to all bases in a, 2, u, while the suffix no of the gen, is confined to bases in ४ and w, and the suffix e of the loc. to bases in @.)
(5). The only forms which are peculiar to the bases in @ in the mascu- line gender are those of the abl. sing. and the ace. plural; indicated by large capitdls,. (This is the converse of No. 3.)
The principle in the above explained order is to proceed from the most general to the most particular forms. It will be seen ab once that it is this principle on which the sitras I, 5—16 are arranged, We have first (by No. 1) stitras on the instr., abl. and gen. plural of all genders (ingdt parasya,
J, 5—8); secondly (by No. 2) stitras on the instr., abl., gen. and loc. sing.,
and the nom. and ace. plural of the feminine (striydm, I, 9, 10). Thirdly (by No. 8) stitras on the abl. sing. and nom. ace. plural of the masculine (pumst, I, 11,12). Fourthly (by No. 4) stitras on the gen. and the loc. singular of masculines (pumsi, I, 18,14). Lastly (by No. 5) stittras on the abl, sing. and ace. plur. of the masculine (yumlinge, I, 15, 16).
The arrangement of the several siitras within each of these five minor
fad
divisions is regulated by mere considerations of convenience or grammatical .
usage. Thus in the first subdivision, Chanda commences with the 8678 on the gen. plur., because the gen. plur. has ¢wo forms for all three kinds of bases (in 4, 4, #), one of which it has in common with Sanskrit (see Sanskrit column). This is indicated by the fraction 4. The gen. plur., therefore,
` 28 the natural link between the Sanskvitic cases, treated in stitra I, 8, and the Prdkritic cases, treated afterwards. Next follows the stitra on the
instr. plur., because this case has its form in common with Sanskrit, with the exception of masc. bases in a* Lastly comes the stitra on the abl. plural
* The treatment of this case requires a word of explanation. The fact is, that Chanda was here met by an awkward dilemma. The Prakrit instr. plur. suffix Az is really the same as the Skr. bhis (or bhih), from which itis modified by the genoral phonetic laws of Prakrit (४, ¢., by the rules ITI, 18. II, 10, 11). Accordingly there would have been no need of any special stittra (I, 7), teaching the formation of the Prak, instr. plur., if only Sanskrit had used the suffix 0025 with every kind of base; but unfortunately Sanskrit does not use his, but ais, with masc. bases in a. It, therefore, became necessary for Chanda to formulate a special sitra to meet the oxceptional case of these 10830, a-bases. Here came the dilemma. If he had made a special sitra (after the analogy of I, 15, 16) for 19980, @-bases alone (say, Aé bhiso’tah), this, by its terms, would have denied the suffix At to all other bases; which would have beon manifestly wrong. Tf, on the other hand, he made, a special stitra for all bascs, this would@seem to imply that the suffix
Adis altogether Prékvitic (like the abl. ‘plur. suffix Ainto I, 8), whereas it is really a ‘Sarskritic suffix (sumskritavad vibhakti) and ought to be set down under sittra I, 8. In
ordér to escape this dilemma, what Chanda did, was this: in order to indicate the
Sanskritic character of the suffix 47, ho mentioned it under sitra I, 3, but oxcludod
19111 INTRODUCTION.
which has nothing in common with Sanskrit. Again in the third subdivision . Chanda commences with the stitra on the nom. and acc. plural, instead of that on the abl, singular, simply because the stitra (I, 10) which immediately precedes it referred to the nom. and acc. plur. ; a circumstance which saves the repetition of the term jassasoh. Lastly in the. fifth subdivision, Chanda places the acc. plur. before the abl. sing., because the usage of native grammarians is to treat of the accusative (or second case), whether plural or singular, before the ablative (or fifth case) ; though another reason may have been, that stitras I, 15 and I, 16 on the a-bases are parallel to the stitras I, 11 and I, 12 on the z- and u-bases.
There is a technical point of some difficulty with regard to these stitras. That the sitras I, 5—10 refer to any of the three kind of bases (in a, 7, #)
is shown by the absence of any limitation in their terms as well as (in some of them) by their examples. But sitras I, 11, 12 are, as far as their terms are concerned, equally unlimited; yet they are only applicable to bases in zandw. How is this to be known? The limitation is ingeniously indicated
in two ways; 1, by the examples ; these are only taken from bases in 2 and w; |
the example of the a-base will be found in stitra I, 3; thus indicating, that the a-base forms its nom. plur. not by the rule I, 11, but by the rule I, 3. Secondly, there is the special svitra I, 15, which by its very existence limits the sphere of sitra I, 11 and shows that the a-base forms its acc. plur. not _ by the rule I, 11 but by the rule 1,15. The sitra I, 11 being thus limited _ to the ४ and w-bases, the sitra I, 12, of course, is equally limited to those bases by the well-known grammatical usage of vartanam or “ implication.” * Morcover the same implication is carried on to 50105 I, 18, 14, till it is pro- hibited by the introduction of the term atah “after a-bases” in stitra I, 15. At the same time, the two stitras I, 18 and I, 14 are only partially applica-
ble to bases in ¢ and #; for they partially refer also to bases in a. How is
examples of masc. a-bases ; next to meet the exceptional case of the latter bases, he formu- lated a special sitra (I, 7) in general terms (hi bhisah), but excluded examples of any base
save those of masc. a-bases. In either case, therefore, he uses the examples which he gives _
to define the exact range of the terms of the sitra. This device, to use examples to define the, otherwise misleading, terms of a sittra, is a favorite one with Chanda, Another
striking example (regarding the gen. and loc. sing.) will be noticed further on in the text. `
* The limitation of sitra I, 12 is also indicated by the existence of 8६18 I, 16. In
fact, there are two sets of stitras, viz, I, 11, 12 and I, 15, 16, both being on the acc. plur. = . and abl. sing. Of these the latter set, viz. I, 16, 16, being limited, by its very terms, to = ` । a-bases, shows that the former set must be limited to bases in ¢ and «. There are, thus. | two sutras I, 11, 12 referring to bases in द and ¢ only; next two sttras I, 18, 14 referring,
partially, to both a-bases and i- and u-bases; lastly two sttras I, 15,16 referring to a-bases only, ट
` 818.
INTRODUCTION. lix
this again to be known? ‘The reply is the same as before ; by the examples. . In stra I, 13 the examples of the 2- and w-bases give two forms of the geni-. tive, but that of the a-bage gives only one form, thus indicating that the a-base does not form a genitive in go, but only one in ssa, Similarly in stitra I, 14 the examples of the £~ and w-bases give only one form of the locative each, while the examples of the a-base give two forms; thus showing that the loc. in € does not belong to the ¢ and w-bases, but only to the a-base.* It hardly needs adding, that in stitra I, 16, of course, the term atah is again “implied” from the preceding stitra; though its limitation to the a-bases is also clearly shown by the suffix dt (instead of 452) used in the stitra.
. To return to the Sanskrit columns ; they contain the residue of the forms, which are not noticed in the Prakrit columns, and which are “ samskritavad,” that is, the same as in Sanskrit, excepting that they are modified by the ordinary Prdkrit phonetic laws (IT, 1, 4, 10, 11). These forms are :—
(1.) The nom. and ace. singular of all three kinds of bases (in a, ४, w) and of all three genders ; thus Skr. nom. sing grdmak, Ar. gémao (II, 10) =
„940१० (II, 1; cf. Kachch. II, 1, 32. p. 48); or Skr. pétham, Av. pidha + am = pidham (II, 1; ef. Panini VII, 1. 24. in Laghu Kaumnudi, p. 88) or इत,
agnih, Ay. aggt (II, 10); or Skr«dadht, Ar. dahé (II, 10; cf. Panini VII; 1. 28. in L. K. p. 85); or Skr. nadt, Av. nat; ov Skr. ४८०४४, Ar. ०५४४ (II, 10), Acc. sing. Skr. grémam, Ax. gdma-am = gdmam (II, 1; cf. Panini VI, 1, 107 in L. K. p. 47); or अप, agnim, Ar. aggi+am = aggim (cf. Panini cid.) ; or Skr. gangdm, Ay. gangdém ; or Skr. nadim, Ay. naim, ete.
(2.) The nom. plural of masculine and neuter bases in a ; thus Skr, devah,
, 4. devd (II, 10); or Skr. kulini, Av. huldni or kuldni (IIT, 16).
' ५५
# There can be no doubt that the forms aggie, gure (or aggte, 0006 sic) are nothing
। but clumsy inventions of the thoughtless Revisionists, who mistook the intention of the
For the forms have no support either from Pali or from Prékrit; indeed Hema- chandra and Vararuchi expressly forbid them in their rules (H. त ITI, 128, Vr, VI, 61), which would almost seem to have had in view these forgeries of the Revisionists. Of course, the forms aggie, gurue aro simply the regular Prdkrit forms for the Sanskrit locatives agnike, guruke, containing the pleonastic suffix ka. Nor can it be doubtful that
_ the example devassa 507८ is only by some mischance omitted in MSS. A and B. For the ॥ ‘gen, sing. of a-bases is not mentioned in I, 3 (by any of the four MSS.) where one might 4 2 expect it, ag it isa Sanskritic form; and if it were also omitted in I, 13, there would be '." no noties of it in the grammar at all, That, in such an important form as the gen. sing.
of a-bases in ss, would be simply incredible. Hence the reading of MSS. 0 D, in this respect, must be correct, But the stupid remark chakdragrahandt, etc., of course, is altogether the Revisionists’ own contribution. It was their way of solving the difficulty which I have explained in the text, Thoy cither did not understand Chanda’s method, or thought it not explicit enough. But their solution makes it no better, involving as
it does a most fanciful use. of the term cha.
Ix INTRODUCTION.
(8.) The instr. singular of masc. and neuter bases in @; thus Skr. devédna, 41, devena (ITI, 16)
(4.) The instr. plural of all bases in 7 and w and of all three genders; thus Skr. agnibhif, Ar. 20020 (II, 10. III, 18), or Skr. nadtbhih, Av nathé, ete. The Skr. suffix bhih drops its visarga by II, 10 and changes bf to # by III, 18. The Arsha form, therefore, is perfectly regular; but as the a-bases also take ¢ (for Sky. ath), it is given as the general suffix of the instr, plur. in I, 7. See the footnote on page lvii.
(5.) The gen, plural for all three kinds of bases (in a, 7,#) and for all three genders; thus Skr. grdmdndm, Av. gdma + nam = gdmdnam (I, 5. II 1; cf. PAnini VI, 4. 8, and VII, 1. 54 in L. K. p. 51. ; ¢. 6, Skr. ndm becomes nam by 1 5 ; but nam consists of the augment 2 and the real suffix am, and the final vowel of the base gdéma becomes long ¢ before the initial vowel of the suffix am, by IT, 1).
(6.) The loc. plur. of all three kinds of baseg (in a, 7, #) and of all three genders; thus Skr. deveshu, Ar. deva-su = devesu (cf. Panini VII, 3, 108 in L. K. p. 50), or Skr. agnishu, Ay. aggisu (III, 18), or अत, nadéshu, Ar naisu, ete
It will be observed, that these forms axe precisely those which are enu- merated by Chanda in stitra IJ, 3.
In MS. B a few additional forms are given in siitra I, 8, which, however, _ do not materially affect the above given explanation. They occur in the ace ` plur., and abl. gen. and loc. singular. They may possibly be original portions
of the sttra, as some of the pronominal forms are very old tatsamas (tasmim, | tvayi, ete,), In any case they are, on the whole, correct additions, probably of very early date. But gangd, tumhe and amhe in the acc. ‘plur. and gdme, kule
in the loc, sing. are not quite in keeping with the spirit of the stitra, as the ` ` - :
former forms come under stitra I, 10, 15, the latter under sitra I, 14, For this reason and because the standard MS. A omits them, I have relegated all these additions to the Appendix B C D
ON THE CHANGE OF DENTAL V TO CEREBRAL तभ POSTSCRIPT TO pp, XXV, XXVi.
The only instances in which the Arsha shows an almost uniform use of | the cerebral 2, independent of any influence of a preceding cerebral sound,
are suffixes and particles. Thus there are the declensional suffixes na or nd — श : : of the instr. sing. (I, 3), zo of the abl. gen. sing. and nom. acc plur (I, i: श
12), £ of the nom. plur. neut. (I, 4), ए (or nam) of the gen. plur (I, 5). Again the derivative suflixes tuna (II, 19) of the conjunctive participle, and.
=$ , -
INTRODUCTION. 151
ttana (II, 29) of abstraction. Again the particle paz (II, 17, but never the negative na). In all these cases Sanskrit, whenever it has a corresponding form, uses the dental 2 >
In the case of bases of nouns or verbs, the tendency of the Arsha is just the other way. Here the dental » is almost uniformly usod; there are exceptions in which the cerebral » occurs, independent of any influence of a preceding cerebral sound; but there is no apparent principle in these excep- tions ; for the same word is at one time spelled with dental », at another, with cerebral 2; e. g. ndnam (IIL, 6), but ndnam (III, 19) ; dhannam (BCD, 111, 27), but dhannam (III, 16)
Even as regards suffixes and particles, there is no absolute uniformity of spelling with cerebral 2. Especially is this want of perfect uniformity striking in MS. B. Thus it has instr. sing, devena in I, 3, nehena in II, 27 ; nom. plur. uldnt in I, 8 (bub devdni in I, 4); gen. plur. devdnam in I, 8 (but buddhinam,, nainam, etc.) and vo in the sitra of I, 5 (but na in all examples) ; téana in II, 29 (in the comment, but ¢téana in the stitra and in all examples); nai in IT, 17 (in the stitra, but zat in the comment, and in all
‘examples).. There are only three cases in which MS. B has uniformly the
cerebral ‰ ; viz., in the instr. sing. suffix nd (I, 8), the abl. gen. sing. and nom. ace. plur. suffix zo (I, 11, 12), and in the derivative suffix 24 (II; 19). In the MS. A there are only two instances of want of uniformity ; ४४२. the nom. plur. Auldni in I, 8 (but devdni in I, 4), and nat in II, 17 (only in the sitra). In most cases, probably, this want of uniformity is to be ascribed to the carelessness of tho writers or copyists of the MSS. But in the case of the nom. plur. neuter (where both MSS. A and B agree) and, probably, of the instr. sing. of a-bases (which MS. B uniformly spells with dental 2), I am inclined to believe that both ways of spelling (with or 2) are correct. It will be noticed that in these two cases the Arsha forms are tatsamas, while in the others they are, more or less, decided tadbhavas,” This would account for the change of the dental m into the cerebral 2 being more firmly established in the latter than the former cases; in the case of the instr. sing, suffix 24,
the tendency to that change has even prevailed over the tatsama character . of the suffix
That there was such a tendency to the preferential use of the cerebral n in Prakrit (at least in the Western Prakrit), there can be no doubt; evidence of it, in the modern Western Gaudian, can still be observed. And that it assumed somewhat larger dimensions in later Prakrit times, is clearly shown by the statements of Hemachandra in his Grammar (already referred to on p. xxvi). But there can be no doubt that, in the main, this tendency affected tadbhava forms and words only, and that in the living language, the vernacular Prakrit, it never assumed those large and uniform
}xii INTRODUCTION.
dimensions, which are taught in the Grammars of Vararuchi and others, and are exhibited in the dramatic and other nor-Jaina literature. The state of the modern Western Vernaculars of India venders it doubtful whether, even in the far more limited dimensions taught by Hemachandra, the tendency ever existed in the vernacular Prakrit. That, as soon as the vernacular Prdékrit was used for literary purposes, any such tendency should become slightly more aceentuated, by being subjected to uniform rules, is but natural and a phenomenon attending the literary cultivation of all languages. But that exaggeration of it, which characterises the non-Jaina grammars and litera- ture of Prdkrit, is clearly the outgrowth of a scholastic pedantry and a mark of utter artificialness. In my opinion, the so-called Jaina Praékrit and the so-called Méhardshtri Prdékrit merely differ in so far as that the former is the natural, the latter the artificial literary representative of the vernacular Western Prakrit. The Jain community, always very strong in Western India, employed their vernacular as the language of their sacred writings ; and the literary language, thus formed, naturally kept more or less close to its vernacular prototype; for otherwise it would have defeated its own object of serving as the vehicle of conveying religious ‘instruction to the masses, The Brahmanical , opponents of the Jains, who had no need to be guided by any such consider- ation, and who employed the Sanskrit language for their religious and all higher literature, condescended to employ the literary Prékrit, created by the _ Jains, only for purposes of secular literature of a lower class (erotic and - dramatic poetry, etc.) and, in doing so, subjected the language to a high degree of pedantic artificialization 4 =
There are other evidences, making in the same direction, which however I can here only briefly refer to, as the subject’is not strictly within the scope of the present work. One is the so-called ya-sruéi, mentioned on p. vii. In , Prakrit there is a tendency to elide medial single consonants. There is no difficulty in pronouncing the resultant hiatus, when the latter of the two “meeting vowels is 2 or 05 for then the vowels practically tend to combine (a-+¢ = ai or ay,a+u =o or au, etc.). But if the second vowel’is a, there is some awkwardness in pronouncing the hiatus, especially if both vowels are @ (2 +aora+d, etc.). Hence a tendency arose in the vernacular Prakrit to overcome the awkwardness by sounding the semivowel y (or sometimes 7) . between the hiatus-vowels (aya =a-+a, wa=i+a, wa or wa=ut+a, ete.) ; a tendency the operation of which explains the origin of many modern Gaudian forms and which is still observable in the present day. When, how-
ever, the vernacular Prdkrit came to be cultivated by the Jains, another ` ae
tendency, apparently, arose, of looking upon the ya-sruti as a vulgar practice” ४
and of reducing its use within narrower limits. Hence Hemachandra, in his , '
Grammar of the Jaina Prakrit, allows the ya-srwéi only in the more difficult
INTRODUCTION. 15111
case of the hiatus between two a (H. €. I, 100). The non-Jain cultivators
of Prakrit (e. g., Vararuchi in his Grammar of the Méh4rdshtri Prdkrit) went a step further in the artificialization of the language and prohibited, or at least ignored, the use of the ya-sruti altogether, evidently thinking that the admission of it would stultify the paramount Prdkrit rule of eliding medial consonants and thus creating hiatuses.
Another evidence is the curious rule of Chanda (II, 2), that the first of
_ two hiatus-vowels 18 elided, if the’second is followed by 9 conjunct consonant.*
Hence arise such words as devindo for devendo, katujjoo for katojjoo. This rule is utterly ignored by the grammarians of the later literary Prdkrit, both the Jaina and the Méhérdshtri. Nevertheless it is a rule which must have been always observed in the vernacular Prdkrit, for it is still observed in the present day (6, g., in Hindi joginda, narinda, as well as jogenda and narenda). The reason of its being ignored in the later literary Prdkrit was probably this. In the later Prékrit a tendency arose to change £ and w to 6 and o respectively before conjunct consonants (see Vr. I, 12, 20. H. 6. I, 85, 116); a practice apparentiy unknown to the older Prdkrit of Chanda. The result of this tendency would have been to produce alternative forms (devinda and devenda ; kawjjoo and kaojjoo) ; of these forms those with 6 and o (devenda and kaojjoo) resemble their Sanskrit equivalents (devendra, kritodyoga) much more nearly than the others with 2 and w Hence the latter forms, together with the rule which produced them, came evidently to be looked upon as vulgarities and accordingly as things to be avoided. But that 18 an incorrect view; and that the forms with ¢ and w are the older of the two (those with a and o being in
_ fact, in many cases, modifications of the older forms in ¢ and w, and not direct
derivatives of their Sanskrit counterparts) is proved by the practice of the .
# modern Vernaculars, in which both forms often occur side by side
ON THE TREATMENT OF MEDIAL SINGLE CONSONANTS PostscRIp? TO pp. xxvi and xxviii
The remark as to the permissive character of Chanda’s rules, of course,
eee : also applies to his rule ITI, 34. It is not to be supposed that in the Prakrit
of Chanda’s time the sonant consonants were uniformly elided, any more than that the surds were uniformly preserved. But just as the latter were occa-
¢" ad sionally softened to the corresponding sonants (see Oh. III, 12), so the
former were occasionally retained. But I think the existence of the rule III, 85 (on the ya-sruti), which provides for the treatment of a particular
* The rule, apparently, only applies to compound words, as shown by the examples. =,
lxiv INTRODUCTION. _
kind of hiatus, shows that such hiatuses must have been sufficiently common to require that rule; and since hiatuses could only arise by the elision of sonant consonants, it is clear that such elision was a common occurrence. I conclude therefore, that in the Prakrit of Chanda’s time, as regards surd consonants, preservation was the regular practice, while as regard sonants, elision was the rule; in both cases, there might be exceptions; but Chanda’s grammar, clearly, was formulated so as to suit the generality of phenomena, leaving exceptional or less general phenontena to be provided for by the permissive character of his rules. This is the point of view I have followed in editing and, where necessary, restoring his Grammar. It may be added that rules, like Ch. ITI, 81. II, 21, 28, also point to a greater tendency towards detrition on the part of the sonants, than on that of surd consonants,
॥ “ओं ओगणेशय नमः? ॥
———8-05 O00 प्रणम्य* शिरसा At खल्पैर् व्यापिभिरौ wat: । wad प्राकृत वच्छे किंचिद् aguas अं ॥ ९ ॥ ata लेपः कचित् सन्धिः कचिद् वशैविपय्ययः | (रश्रागमेऽन्तादिमध्येषु लच्छ स्यात् तत् तु भाषितं ue i Os क्रमेण नवनवतिः चाणि ॥ ॥ 1 ॥ सिद्ध महतं Sar ॥९॥
fag) प्रसिद्धं प्राकृतं Ser?) विप्रकारं (=) भवति<॥ (“संछ्लतयोमि।
तच् चेद् । | यज्ञः८*९) जन्नो(९)। ¶ माचा मन्ता । **नित्यं fare । cafe
ran
* C qv ट्डमतात् किंचित् wad aad वच्छे अचरः खल्पर वयापिभिः शिरसा
. बोर प्रणम्य + 0 व्यापिभिर व्यापनणश्ौलः॥ { Cored) safe खंस्छतं । तच्रभवं ततः `
श्याग्तं वा wad dead afiu भाषा शब्द शास्नेष निशिता प्राछ्लतं तन्नं त्यं देश्यादिकम् अनेकधा ॥- ऽ C संस्छतयानि। dears Shc aa तत् dee ata
,.. : | Carat यजनं । पुलिंगे । यश्य जः (iii, 15 जज्ञः) | वणंविश्षेषं छवा wR पञ्चमा वा (iii, : 6 जलजः) । दजथानां रनखाः (iii, 19 जनः) । ललाप द्विलं (आ, 24 लन्नः)। रदेद्रख्ोपा
विसब्जेनौ यस्य (ii, 10 srt) खराणां खरे qe (ii, 1) HHT ¶ 0 माचा काल
`,“ faite: eng वा अचिस्यन्दनभ्रमाणंकालः। सरोलिंगे ॥ +* ¢ नित्यं! नपुंसके ॥
oa , ` (YC prefixes ८० = 80 ; the same number occurs inthe same place in a MS. १ ieeg ‘of. the Jain work tatvdrihddhiqgamam mokshasdstram, in my possession; D Ss.) pref. €e=60, (8) C Si नमः fed; D St aw fee (द) 8० A; O Dread co . ... श्ागभेऽन्तादिमष्येष wer स्यात् स सुभाषितात् Bom. the secand verse altogether
(४) SoA; BCD om. this clause, (4) B om. this stitra, giving only the commentary. (९) Bom. (©) B चिधा॥ (=) ADom. (€) ^ Bom. (१०) So
oo 7; ABC cdf un (६९) A aw, 8 यन्नाः॥ (tk) A we, Borg, OD 2. set (89) AB om. : ति
1
९ ॥ विभक्तिविधानं प्रथमं ॥ | I, 2. 8.
Useraa* । तच् Sty खरो । Bary sre) aize® । ` कमलं“) । इत्यादि ॥ देशोप्रसिद्ध* (0 (९) । तच् चेदं ॥ efa- ते) ef Sed चद्धिकेाज्वलितं Oud चन्दिकोच्जलोय | इत्यादि ॥ | ॥ 2 ॥ fat च yey
mad fea श्रपि वेधा) चिप्रकारं(९९ भवति ॥ देवार । गगा) कुलं ॥ ॥ 3 ॥ तसात् संत्वर् विभक्तयः nen
तस्मात् लिंगात् पराः dese विभक्तयो) भवंति FC’ ॥ द्वे । ९९ ९७ Ve ०) । Aged श्रम । FICO । बुद्धि) । Pal) । FEC) law), पौढं(९९)।
*.0 dead dea सम ॥ † 0 खरा रविः। सेमा चन्द्रः | जालं पारः | कद्खं `
wae कालं सुकुमार ॥. - ‡ 0 देवः। रदोद्र" (i, 10 देव्यो)! खराणां खरे vate. -
सोपसंधयः (7, 1) देवा। § C अग्गौ खग्निः। प्च (iii, 6 afin) | Sree (iii,
अग्निः) । खरोऽन्याऽ्यस्य (ii, 4 अमः) । WR Gi, 10) ख्मो॥ || एकादा
खचघधभानां (iii, 18) ॥
(९) 4 8 सम संख्तं ॥ (२) ^. जाल॥ (र) ^ कंद्ल, 8 कं॥ (8) ^ 2 कोमल; । । CDadd wren (४) B देग्तौयप्रसिम् ; it may be noted here, that A Bnob ,
uncommonly write म् or स् for a final anusvdra at the end of a clause or sentence.
oe , (& © 7 om. the remainder, in the place of which they havea different reading; . ,. Fogo . see AppendixC D. (©) Aom. Sanskrit. (८) A पद् चष्डिकोच्यदुलौ i. (९) `£ ` a | . 5 चसु ॥ (९८) A 8 चिधा॥ (९९) ^ 7 om., B चिम्प्रकारं ॥ (१९) D adds Skr. देवः॥ 2 :: QR) Baia: or ae Pn (१४) O D prefix ey ॥ (९४) A B om. this case-term. ; . ~ A BC D read finalw and @, where the text has 2 and w. and OD add the ४
~ She. translations देवः। अप्निः। रिपुः) बुद्धिः Gas. नदौ । वध् । पठः) द्धि । oe
aera aS] Sari कुलानि । etc. (१९) OD add ग्धः । we ॥ (९७) AB < “ 8 ५ बडे 5..0 7 om, this example. (एक) Bay, 00 षेए ॥ (१९) 4602) रट We ,
(९०) A Cag ॥ (९९) 0 % पौठः | wer ॥ 7 Zoe
18] ` ॥ विभक्तिविधानं प्रथमं ॥ 7 a
ददि । मह । AO । we ॥ जस् ॥ देवार) कुलानि) । वयं ५) तद्ये रह्म । (07) ॥ श्रम्) ॥ देवं । च्रग्गिं। गुर) sats बुद्धि । dat al । AY eer asi Cat मां ` तां wag? ge) (BOD) war ॥ Sau । गुरुणएा(९९) । ददिणा(*०) ॥ भिस् ॥ श्रणिर्दि(*२ । रिपृर्हि(*९) । बुद्धि । नदर ददि(१९। afefe 1 apes? । 1 तुन्देदि(९२) । श्रम्टेहि(९२) ॥ इरसि९ (BCD) ॥ ag) (CD) ॥ gat) (BCD) ॥ aq ॥ sara’) | agra) । FAR) । नदणं(र) । AIO AGE) RCA”)
* 0 गंगं dat) खरोाऽ्यान्यस्य (i, 4) दूत्येन ain † ¢ घेन । (षेन्-अम्)। । खराणां (ii, 1 Sawa or Vea) | खरोा० (ii, 4 घेन्म्) | Weare (ii, 11 धेने) ॥ EO यश्माभिः। युष्मदा यस्य तः (iii, 17 तष्माभिः)। crsret सः (7, 18 तुस्माभिः) | । वग (iii, 8 तुसामिः)। शयो र” (ii, 28 तुन्दाभिः)। खरो० Gi, 4 तुम्देभिः) । चद्ागमो° (ii, 11 तम्देभिं) । f भिसः ८, 7) वुष्देददिं GC afi तेषां । रशषाणं सः (iii, 18
तेसां) | खरोऽन्योऽ्यस्य (ii, 4) tarda षाम् दूति सिं भवति। तेसं ॥
~
ane ed (९) So A (866 866. ii, 2, 21), B gaa, C D तुमं॥ (२) D अद्ध and, after oe. 3 30, adds ganfeu (र) A देवाः, 8 देवः (cf p. 2, note १३). (8) CD कलशि ॥ ` ae 2.) (४) 5 बयं; © D have a different reading, see Appendix OD. (६) 4. 26818 =, ओ ` “^ confusedly qf जस् । धेनुं | Tre as । लां। मां तं cA, om. the rest of ` , ` `: the examples of the acc. कण्डु. ; © D add the Skr. translations 241 | ` . @fty we) dat) बदिं। धेनुं । नदौ । पौटं। द्धि। wen (©) OD add fey freq \ | oo (D in MS. रिव)॥ (=) 8०8; CD ain (<) BD gfen (१९०) ODA + ..` 0, Bom, (१९) ^+ ठ पौठं॥ (१९) A reads @r at dt, BO Uta ate Wt, D gute * . क्ीतंमांमंर°॥ (92) A B रक्ल्यो, 01) रक्ल्ठ ॥. (१४) A 011. ; 869 App. BC D co (ay Beta; OD ‘add Skr. देगेन। गरुणा। ew (१९) BC D add asurtt J? < (qe) Dadds रिण ॥ (१८) ABCD wari (१९) ¢ feats, D frafe; Bom 2)", this éxample ; A om. this and the remaining examples of the instr plur.; CD + add the Ske. translations afyfa| रिपुभिः बदधिभिः। नदीभिः। द्धिभिः। aefa: 1 oo Sparfia: | agra ॥ (२०) Bagif, 0 ब; Dafefe and adds गरदं ॥ (९२९) | 07 arte (२९). BOD दरो, agen (९९) BD read शदो ॥ (२४) A om.; “` see App. BOD. (२४) B टेवानां (see i, 5) ; D adds Skr. देवानां ॥ (९९) D gon । webs `" (९७) Aom. this and the remaining examples of the gen. plur.; CD Haw `, ,' : (=) ५ 7. win (२९). 7 asi, Com. (२०) © D add जेसिं | Fatt ॥
os नः
an” ~ <~ भ , ~
४ ॥ विभकिविधानं प्रथमं ॥ (I, 4-6.
(5807) sen देवेसु । श्रगिसुः९। बुद्धिसु माला- सु“) । ata । कुलेसु) । gee । wea 1 (CD) ॥ दृत्यादि< |
५२ aed ५६ म 7 TOF td न ड Hot ^ द्ध्व when? 48 4
wat लिंगानां कचिद् व्यत्ययो भवति ॥ sal) ॥ fazer देवाणि(\१ रकसेतु(५९) ॥
॥ 5 yo शामम्याय rar aC!) BC) का ॥ ४५
(९५)सागमस्यामेाऽनागमस्यापि एकारो भवति हा ati ताणं aré ॥ Stara’) देवादहं । कम्यमाणं ware) (\°)सरिताणं aftate । (CD)
(\नतुम्हाण तुम्दादं॥ । (CD) ध वा i
HO a Segre CO wm ॥ ६ ४ | * (0 व्यत्ययः) विपयंयः॥ + ¢ fesrar विद्युत् । श्चदागमेा° (ii, 11 fear) 1
वम्योदु० (ii, 5 विद) । तवमस्य (ii, 16 विजु)। लोपे (iii, 24 विच्लु) । णो
डनसख (i, 12 feerar) ॥ { Card) ares तेषां॥ < ¢ सव्वषां शब्दानां अग्रे खाम्
aud) vata स्थाने एः दवितौयस्धाने रो विकल्पेन द्वौ क्ेयो॥ | ¢ देवानां । |
wat) सुरितां। युस्माकं ॥ oe
(९) A om. 7 देवत; B prefixes Skr. Z3y (९) ^ 5 अमो, CD wag (द) A agte, BC ae, D qateu (४) A © om, OD add
`. मालासु॥ (४) A om, C wy, Dugy (ई) CD om (७) 7 gay `. `
and adds qagu (=) B wag, C ead, D agin (९) BOD wat `
, -द्ध्ये॥ (५०) So A; BCD wet जं, CD add wer, Fern (RO `
“gids देवाद् देवाद् ; D adds aren (९२) 7 रक्वरथ्ा॥ (92) Batu (ee) D mee (१४) B सागमस्याप्यमो अनाग ॥ (१९) Boom. (१७) ACD viceru , .- `.
सरि; B सरिवाश्चाणं सरियाच्ाडं; D prefixes सरितां ॥ (5) AB gud os . `.
aay; D gare gare (ke) C 7 संख्यायाः॥ क,
I, 6*-30.1 ॥ विभक्रिषिधानं प्रथम् ॥ # 8
संख्यायाः परस्य सागमस्यानागमस्याप्य् Brat wet भवति ॥ (CD) | ` *पंचण्टं । fae । इत्यादि ॥ hen (GD) ॥ ei ॥ 7 ॥ RO Pre + ७ a
लिगात् परस्य भिस fe? भवति ॥ देवेहि । गामेडिर 1(CD)n HS ॥ fa स्थः} ५८ |
लिंगात् परस्य wet हितिः भवति ॥ गामेदिता.) । सिदध हिति ऽ) afefear 1 Fala 1 नदईैदिंते(\०)। तुन्दते 1 श्रन्देडिंतेा(५२.॥ । | ४9) ठतौयासैमाख् waa” gaa feat ॥ € ५ | दतोयादौनां गा डसि डम्घ् ङि वचनानां स्तिया ए भवति ॥ गंगाए । बुद्धौ) ate) । age । ate) । ताए॥ ॥ | ॥ 10 } Breer) gerne ॥ ९० ५
* ¢ dew! पंव्वानां ॥ पचन् यदागमा (ii, 11 परंच)। संद्याया we: (i, चप) अनखारा० (ii, 15 पंचण्द)॥ ft 0 Maw) ` चिंतां ॥ चिंणत। रेफः” (ii, 9 विंशत् ) | अनखारो० (ii, 15 तित् )। Sere Gi, 4 तौग्रत्) । रणष्षाणां स (ॐ, 18 तौसत्)। तस्य च WY अनेन तलपः (iii, 88 तौस) ` Sera we ¢ तौसण्ड)। अनुखारो० (i, 15 तौसष्दं)॥ TC देवें arn ऽ © dare गंगया।
os गंगायाः मंगायाः। मंगार्या॥ || C ate are, तया तस्याः तस्याः तस्यां ॥
` (९) A नोणण्दं; CD prefix Hew (2) BCD Fen (६) OD om; but
¦ . :\ gee App. OD. (a) ^ दिति ॥ (५) A भिसो ॥ (€) 4 ¢ ००. BD गमाहिता; D i. “prefixes परामेभ्यः | (७) ^ सिद्धौ न्ति, B सिदाद्दिते ; C D read देवेश्िता and add
waitwart ween (८) BC बद्धोदितोा,^ Dagon (€) OD due, AB Gaon (१०) OD wef earn (१९) BD तुशे” and Wee ॥ (१९) A om. ; see i, 29 (९९) A एकलम्, 3 रवम् ॥ (९४) ABD gon (९४) CD wth (१९) ARN (९७) OD place तार । तौर ॥ (१८) ^ ओंउ० ; 3 vara ॥ (\९) CD were, |
:; Baga il
é ॥ faafafert प्रथमं ॥ I, 10\—18.
feat ama’) जग्शसेर्^र) श्रो उ लेपाश् च adfa® ॥
Oma माला माला । Yagti बुद्धौ बुद्धौ । Sari
(Sas धेनु । नदशा ake ak ॥ एवं श्सेऽपि ॥ ॥. 10" ॥ (079) शन्न ॥ A 11 ॥ पुंञचि यत्वेन) ॥ १९. ॥ पसि पुलंगे वन्तमागयोर् amen) पृव्वेखरे† भवति ॥ श्रमी (<) | गुरू ॥ 11* ॥ 6 ॥ ९१ ॥ ॥ 12 ॥ णा छसे | ॥ ९२!
, पुंलिंगे वर्तमानयेर् sma णो भवति । पंचम्येकवचनस्य च ॥ श्रशिणे जलंति । दमुणिणि gag?) । |गिरिणे एति५९) नई(९९) ॥
eae ob 3g’) च we) ¶॥ ९३ ॥ ` ` पचि वत्तमानस्य इन्धा छो भवति । qa च भवति(१५)॥ ¶सुणिणि
te
* © does not: give the Sanskrit equivalent of any of these exam-
ples; but, instead of it, the two numbers 18 and 28 are inscribed over each - - 4
१३ ; र ड Ss form; thus मालवा ॥ tC arew: पूव्व शब्दस्य wtaqreg एव ane i { © are
oS -ज्रेनि॥ § 0सुनौन् षश्य॥ || 0 गिरेः स्काष्यात्रति नदौ.। 5 गिरितः र्ति व्रते ॥ ` `
¶ Bayt ea
(१) Aréads वत्तमाना va wea (2) CD ज्नस्शसोर् ॥ (३) B reads
> ` श्चा भवेंति। लोपा भवति॥ (a) A has final ओ, and D has final उ, instead: ` % : _ of च्च, in all examples; exc. D west; B places माला. wrerait and. iy श । so on throughout. (४) B qe in all three examples. (ई) + @7 ण॒ for नू ` “in all three examples (७) 2 प्रव्ववत्॥ (र) Aom. (<€) CD prefix gary. < (९०) पस्सन्ति॥ . (९९) ABC, Deu (१२) ACD WE, Bata (५९६. .. .. OTN (९४) 4 SHG (१४) ^. ०. ` । प She, श
aes Asay ine
, 1, 14—16.)] | ॥ विभक्रिविधानं प्रथमं ॥ ७
Ost (सुणि रूपं । +च्रगिणा fast aftr fern (र)देवस् arate । (07) ॥ 4१ सि Si wt पुंसि डिवचनस्य ए.“ भवति । fa च भवति ॥ (“च्रगिर्िं। aren? (गामे गामि ॥ 15. y पष्पस ॥ ९५१ sa gare उत्तरस्य wa) df ए भवति ॥ देवे।.। aa ॥ # 16 ॥ (रतौहहितिलेपाम् तातः ॥ ९६ ॥ (Onna: meme) तो तु ददिंतेलेोपा५ एते
* BC aq श्िखा॥ + 0 देवस्य wrath †{ 0 warn Sat) शमौ or ्ग्गिणा (i, 11. 12) ॥९॥. खणग्मिं। अगम or S@fardt (i, 11. 12) nea अश्गिणा G, 6५) । wnt (1, 7) ten श्यग्गिणि or aie | अगमौणं or ahs (i, 13.
1, 5) ॥ ४॥ अग्गिणे (©, 12) । aatfeat ¢, 8) ॥ ५॥ ्ग्गिणि or fag (i, 18) 1
eared or Barts (i, 5) ॥९॥ अग्गि२(१६) or अग्मिश्ि ८, 14) | आमरु or eats
“ , & 8. 15) non Seat) दे अग्गौ or दे अण्िणि ॥ एवं दकारांतानां सर्वषां
Os arf ar i §CAT HN गरू. Te or WATT HW Qt गुरु । गरू Or HATH RU WET | गरूद्दि ॥ Ql गरणा or WW | गरूएं or VET! ४॥ गरणा | गरूद्िता ॥५॥ waar or
ACY | गरूणं or गरदं ॥ ९ ॥ ATT (१९) or TWAT | TVY or AVF ॥ ७॥ दे WE दे गरू or
ah श्देग्दणो॥ एवं उकारांतानां west caf |] C रेवान् । TATA “Sie ९) Arends Wee (see i, 12); BOD रूवं ॥ (९) 0 7 रूवं; ABom. सुषि .. ", रपं । अग्गिणो fret (द) 0 places देव॒ सोद before अग्स्म feet; A Bom
ee „ ४) 6:72 efarg भवति ॥ (४) ^ prefixes @fre, BCD Santen (९) D prefixes
: Jo अदर, C wee; but not AB. (©) CD prefix @4) eafa t (=) B om. this ; "| shtra and its commentary. (€) A अतो अकारादट् ॥ (१०) D शशः ॥ (१९) A
^; येभमरे (seo ii, 15). (१९) ^+ 2.07) read Gwe for argo, and © 7) insert हिं oe after उ B has the marginal note दिं afe ॥ (१३) ^ पंचमो Baa Bree, B पंचमी
2. A BOD Sree for Age ॥ :* (९९) MS. sane and TRE ॥.
ति . श्वतं खाद्०, 0 पंचमो त् । Bee, D पचत् परस्य Be? ; C had originally खात्, एप ` । ,.. thelong 4 is changed to कणु yellow pigment. (१४) B आदे णातकारस्य ॥ (९४)
(न ॥ विभक्तिविधानं प्रथमं ॥ CL, 17. 18.
्रादेशा भवंति.“ ॥ @agqurat* | गयणातु । गयणहिंता(र)
meat”) ॥ | 117 ॥ afezan® > aeerat™ gre a |
ag® इदम् श्रनयोर् एकलदिलबह्वेषु witadaayg यद् रूपं तस्य से भवति ॥ तखाः) रूपं BEG । तस्याः(<) aan) Baal) ।
(“अस्याः रूपं BRO, Osan गुणः से गृणा । एवं Weg
रपि zea) ॥ ४ 18 ) युष्मदः } ९८ ॥
त(९९) ag fener भवति ॥
# 0 गगनात्। कगचज० (or कटतौय० iii, 84) इत्यनेन गकारस्य लोपः (wae) |
. ` :. भशस्थिते चलम् wad: (or य° Gag ii, 85 गयन) । तवर्गस्य (16 मयर) | खरतर
` & 4 ग्या) । Ste (2, 16) दवि wear † 0 गयणशे(१७)। गया । रे गयणे। - ष्टे गयणा॥९॥ गयणं। गया or गये (1,15) ॥ २॥ wea, गयणेडि or गयणेदि or
गयरदिं॥ Te) गयणाणं or गयराष्टं ॥ ४॥ गयशच्या or Aware or गयणाद्दि or
गयणादितो or गयणा | गयणेदिता॥४॥ Wawa) गयणाणं or गयणाद्॥१॥ गये or गयणश्डि | TITY or ITE ॥७॥ खं सर्वषां अकारांतानां रूपं नेयं ॥ TO युश
. SRN रूपाणि॥ GH! तन्दे॥९॥ तर ० gd: Gauri ते० तुमे or तद्र
or ati gery or gre or gets ie Ae or तुक or दु्द। तुम्दाणं or awe or Gale u qa or qrerfwat or qrersit or तदृन्ता) qf wari yy
तद or तुज्ज or Gel ठतुम्दाणं or तुम्हा or तु्दं॥९॥ तद् or guia qag.
or qq ॥ 9 ॥
(१) A adds Fee; BOD insert ददि after: oqo n (र) A Wawa, गयशख with ¢ BCD गयणाखा । गया (with £). (द) A waufear (with ¢) ; ib also adds गयशाददिं (with 4), while B C D prefix it. (४) © 7 add रवं Sze: It
@ABD eau (९) 4 ०. पद्चौ॥ (७) 07 तत्॥ (5) ABaart (€) 8० 4; , ˆ 4 8८7 ख्वं॥ (१०). 5860गृणा॥ (९६) + Daan (९२) A Bom. the काण. |
f ¥
examples.. (१६) A BOD wii (१४) Dom. this example, but, on the other " ae 4
hand, adds तयोः शूपं Wea | ताखां दपं से रूवं ॥ (१४) Beary (१९) 0 7 wary (१७) Soin MS., as mage
1, 19 —22.] ॥ विभक्रिविधानं प्रयमं ॥ ९
1 19 ॥ get सौ विभक्तैः ॥ १९ ४
यश्नच्न्दस्य सविभक्तः सौ परतः(र) तमं श्रादेशो भवति ॥ Sad देवा ॥ (CD) a ' 4 20 un Ment ह at) {९०५४
gual श्रमि परे (° तुमं भवति तुए च) सविभक्ेः ॥ तमं भणामि ए भणामि ॥ (617) ॥ । 21 ॥ Oga®” अहि nee i
gmt (जसि परे Ga भवति। सविभक्ेः॥ ga) मनुर ५९ खरा ॥
॥ 2 nae afew ९९॥
qua.) शसि परे qa) भवति ।. सविभकतैः ॥ gaOY {मनुससा(*५ भणामि) ॥
॥
*Cwufa| संस्छतसमम् Sa { Carver) मनष्य॥ खरो (ii, 4 मान्य) | . wage (iii, 16 माण्ष्य)| रश्लाणा सः (111, 18 माणस्ध) | एवसलेभ्या° (ili, 2 Arve) | ` लापे° (iii, 24 मापस्स॒) | afee (7, 11 arom) | खराणां (7, 1) साण्ससा॥ TC) here gives the same gloss as the preceding, omitting only the initial खरा० Il
(१) C 7०208 तं तु तवं वद्दं॥ तमं सी स०; 7 तं तं qd वुं त॒मं सै ei oo (x) CD read परत एते पंच आदेशा भवंति॥ (द) C 1७805 तं तु तुं. तहं ॥ लं तमं `` ` दियि॥ ४) © feet, D fegr . (५) CD place this sttra after the following. voces XQ) OD add gaan (७) CD read तुर तुमं तं च भवति। सविभक्रेः॥ (=) C ^... place this example before the other, and add तं aurfa il (€) OD plaee (1 this श before the preceding one. (%°} So B,A qu, C qa, ¬ qual” na . , (९५) ५. places जसि परो after भवति ॥ (९९) So B; A afwer, 0 D साणएस्सा .* in © मणस्सा is) corrected by later hand, but the original reading (माएस्सा _ is supported by the marginal gloss (q.v.). (42) Awa, B wer; CD add _ the Skr translation यूयं मनुष्याः श्ण (Cin MS. सराः) ॥ (९४) Aga, 8 तम।॥ र; । -(Qw Acai (९९) ^ WHE, CD wwe (१७) C D add $. खान् मनुष्यान ,. “. . भणामि॥ a
९० a विभक्तिविधानं प्रथमं ॥ [I, 23. 24.
॥ प ते ae ae ae arat yee ॥
que) टावचने (रपरे ते तुमे. तद au एते श्रादेश भवंति । सविभकेः ॥ किं) ते कते५) । तुमे भद्रो) । tar as aA) तए {पला ॥
tu gate दभावा garni? agi) deat ॥२४॥
ana’) पंचम्येकवचने परे तुमा gqarfea) तुमातो९५) arta’) एते mdm भवेति aft ॥ तुमा ae ato तुमाहिते(*) श्रहं gear? । तमातो शरदं lara । तदन्ता faa’ (CD) ॥
, © (दिदे | दृष्टः॥ खरारि० (ii, 5) eq अनेन Bay ह ta ay fe मवति (दिष्टः)! .. (ii, 3). इत्य् चनेन AW छ इति षकारस्य Sra: | र स्थितं (feet) | लोपे (iii, 24 fas:)| तखिन्” (iii, 26 fas) i दोदर (ii, 10 टिया) । खराच्णं° Gi, 1 fest) 1 + CB aq ay adi {8 पक्लातं ware ¢ vad sew § B aw grat || Carat: aufage छेते सति जा दूति स्थितं) शच्च (iii, 6) दत्य ष्यनेन Sera: (जानौ) | दजथानां ° (1, 19 नानो) | तवम्गेष्य° (iii, 16 नारौ) ॥
"~~
(Q()B चट॥ (₹) 467 ण्ट्ष् ॥ (द) 4 ०1. परो-एते 1०५]. (४) A किन्ते॥
(५) ABCD ad; 67 पत the Skr. translations f तया छतं । लया दृष्टः।
ल्या सम (B सध्ये in marginal gloss, १. ए.) छतं । लया प्रलपते (8० 0 ; D प्रलपितं) tt
(६) AB fag, C feet, D दिष्ठा?) ॥ (७) A waa कयं, 3 data, ¢ 7 asm कयं ॥
| (=) ^ पल्लत, B gard, ¢ wad, 1 पलवक्ति॥ (<) 8 तुमद्दितो॥ (१९०) .^ 7 gars,
` 56 व॒मच्ा॥ (१९) CD तदतो ॥ (\९) Ace (१२) A तुमाद्दिम् carey, om. . : ` the-other forms. (१४) B तुमदिता, Aom. (xu) BC तमाय, D तुमा, कक, om. .
`. -. (९६) Bexar; 7 adds the Skr. translations लद् qs We | लदु we सुभगः। लद `
ep arat) लदु we निष्क्रतः, C om. thom in the text, but gives them in the
marginal gloss. . (१७) A om. तुमादितेा ॥ (१८) B orig. Seq, (००४८ सु; 0 .; ` +
सुष्हॐ॥ (te) ए जाणौ, ACD शणो (sec iii, 0. ii, 19). (२०) 80 2; © किम, 6. निकामा, 8. रक्ववं सो ॥ । me
I, 25—28.] 1 विभक्रिविधानं प्रथमं ॥ ९९
25 ॥ ge qa” तन्द्र) र्वा ॥ २५ ॥
qua: षष्ठयेकवचने परे ge तञ“) तुन्द) एते mee भवंति । सविभक्तेः॥ *ge ate । gay) कलाश्रो(*) । ge गुणा) ॥
125° VOD | २५ | ! 25" ॥ © 7) ॥ २१. ॥ ॥ 26 ॥ श्रद्: ॥ २६ ॥ wa) ag) gaara भवति(९२) ॥ ५26 ॥ 7 ॥ ६ ॥ ॥ 26" ॥ OD weer | 126° } OD i x87 4 प 2671 CD ॥ eer ॥ 27 ॥ से av ret ॥ २७ ॥ | me) टावचने परे मे मए भवतः। afar) ॥ 1 मे aA । ` मए दि&(५९) ॥
॥ 28 Wwe) ङन्सा ॥ em y
rear ०० -9० न
# 0 तव लोलं । तव कलाः । तव गुणाः ॥ † ए मया aa
| 1 A ga, 5 वभभ॥ (%) B aa, 0 7 वन्दःः॥ (द) ^ ०५. gy, a, लम्द ॥ (४) 2 त॒भभा॥ (४) Bae Dagari (ई) Awe (७). काला्या, 8 कला ॥ ८) AB gan (९) ^ गुरणो॥ (९०) इत, Dewi (१९) BCD GE il
co (8) A निख्ष्यते॥ (९२) A ८ द्ष्॥ (१४) ABom. (१५) A BCD कयं;
; ` ODadd the Skr. translations सया Ba! wares * (२६) A fesg, Baga int (९७) 80 A; BOD मद्ता॥ ` | = ^,
... ते दोसा५०)॥
~. ~ श, translation लं श्रः (४) A इन्दाद्दितो॥ (६) Beg (©) A ए. ण्ण. ` ~ (=) ^ अन्दारिन्ता, Bowen (<) ^ प्ययो॥ (१०) Bom. अर्पि and comment, —
९२. ॥ विभक्तिविधानं प्रथम ॥ [1, 9--31*. -
wee) पचम्येकवचने परे भद्र ना(९) भवति । सिभक्तेः ॥ tar ga we) ॥ | ॥ 29 ॥ श्रन्टाहितेा0) भ्यक्षि ॥ २८ ॥ sear? भ्यसि परे seria भवति | सविभक्रः<, ॥ श्रम्दादिंता(=) तुमं सरोा(< ॥ | 1 30 ॥ Cae qual) इसि ॥ so ॥ । mae. Waar परे ae asa’) भवतः । सविभकरैः fae TIC | Hs गृणा(२) ॥
॥ 31 ॥ ren) arf yy २९ ॥ sae श्रामि परे च्म्ट्(९ q) भवति \ सविभक्रैः ॥ [न्द्(९९) चिय । | 2 #
1 5१ ८2 nan
॥ 7 ॥ इति dead प्राैतलक्तणे विभक्िविधानं प्रथमं समां ॥९॥
a,
+ 0 मर्तो । मत् ॥ † 0 मम Wee) 1 मम गुणाः I {ए अस्माकन्तेदोषाः॥
(९) Aegan (3)C मदत; B दूता om. म; ^ से सए भवतः (866), 27), `. (2) ^+ मदत, BOD avath (४) A श्रः; B places it ए्ल06 तुमं; Dadds ©. ‘
` ` but gives the examples. (qt) Awa, CDwmarn (१९) Awd; CDadd , Fee .सौखं। सद गण॥ (te) B stan (१४) 7 Dewan (१२५) BODoay. `: . (९९) D ai (९७) Betat ; CD add the Skr. translation wearaa va ते.. ८ | दोषाः॥ (tc) MS. fee ` ee
II, 1°. 1.] ॥ खरविधानं दितीयं ॥ ` < X@
॥ 7 ॥ अथं खरविधानम् are ॥ २॥
ni ॥ 0 ॥ १ ॥
#1॥ 1 ॥ सराण SO प्रहपिङेपदंधवः ॥ ६६
खराणां खरे परे yaar लेप dwar च भवंति । *दृदह(५) श्रच्छति । teeepf® । इद्दागते°) ॥ मद दव हिते । ॥देकिदवंदिते€ । ¶सक्घीसाणा(९०)॥ **ख Sate’ । {1तियसोसेा(*२। Haya ॥ एचदुज्जला(५५) । | |तपोपरोहा ॥ War ऊढा । ¶¶नोसाद्धसासा(९) । *ननमारोा(^° ॥ 11गामनश्रो^ गामे ॥
[1
* 0 दह खब्डद् । safe अच तिष्ठति । अस्य साधनिका। खरो ° (ii, 4) ca यनेन ` - कारस्य दू भवति (xa)! Care (iii, 9 इत) प्रथम° (ili, 11) cata तकारस्य . ˆ धकारः (KB) 1 पुनः प्रथम° (iii, 11) इत्यनेन यकारस््र घकारः (TH) | Fe (iii, 18 इह) | दद दूति सिद्धं ॥ तिषटति(\९) । कगचज° (ॐ 84 इति)! खरो० (ii, 4) दूत्येन ` इकारस्य अकारः (अटति) | षाः (ii, 8 suf) | case (iii, 18 असति) | सस्य Gee: (iii, 14 अति). । लोपे (17, 24) aferte (iii, 26 चअच्छति) | पुनः कगचज° (iii,
. . 84 Set) † ए © चन gare aan { 2 ददददागतः। © संभि। अच aaa So “68 मखदूवद्ितः॥ || 0 लोपः) देवेनद्रवन्दितिः॥ ¶ B णक्रख(९०) Say) अलापः॥ ~, +© लोपः । कर ग्रे fara । fered assed (seo ii, 12) । ware ture waa ++* Bada ¢ संधिः। शच्या dan. एचौखरः॥ ft 0 लोपः । चिद `. च्येदशः। ate 1 Peart den {© df) werat den ९6 ¢ लोषः। eR SP उन्वलला। axyaq Gaet ||| Bo तपसः उपरोधः] ¢ संधिः तपापयधः ॥ TT 3 निःआाखख उच्करासख । अलोपः Cera) (२९) निःखासख उच्छास । निःखासो-
` च्छरारी॥ *** 0 संधिः। Arar मरः ॥ ttt 5 भ्रातः gra: | © ware गामो | wafer
मामो गामोा। संधिः। म्रामात् ara: | but see note to translation. ।
pect ` - (९) Bom. (९) BC Daca (8) 8० AB; OD प्ररतिलोपसमंधयश्च ॥ (४) A. | ¦ ^, has only the examples marked * and इ, om. all others; B places *, §, t, f. «| @Awet BCD अच्छद् ॥ (६) BCD ceeri (७) 2 इइ ।गज, C cea, D Tey (6) A at afey, BawcafSa (sce marginal gloss), C D om. thig - ae 6 (€) 2 न्दिक, D "दि, A Com. (sce ti, 2}. (Xo) B "शाणे, A om. =. (९९) 0 7 सदसो, B सदसो, A om. (९९) B तसा, A om. (92) B awat, A om. (Re) 3 ब॑द्न्नला, ^. ०". (९४) B सेदो, ¢ सा wat, D areeror eset (?) ॥
` (९९) So 8 ; +. om, CD Wheto} (६७) © 7 add सऊरो ॥ (१८) B गामानामो । गानो
Mare गास, 0 मामा गामो, D ware गातो ॥ (१९) 86 MS. and accordingly =, । Co Cs “; the explanation गाह ॥ (९०) MS, ware Kura ॥ (९९) MS. नि्ला०, ware,
९४ ॥ warfare द्वितोयं | [II, 14.
५... द्वि त द) |
बुधौ दमा+ । ` tafgec) बुद्धौषें ॥ वबुद्धौग्रोर । abate ॥ LE ॥ 0 ware
in Duewa
2 ॥ Oda परे ara: ॥ ९ ॥
(“संयोगे परे खरे परतः gare” नित्यं लेपो भवति॥ धनाक्छः(९)
धनदो) 1 देव दनदः(= देविंदा । छत sare agar) ॥ ॥ 3 ॥ Wee संयोगे ys ॥
खराणां wea भवति । (*रसंयागेऽक्तरे(९२) परे ॥ (\*कूव्च॑(९५) | asst | दृच्छित॑.५९) । feed । **सिग्चो(\०) । ††उ डु (८) ) सुच्ना(\९)॥
14 y mcs ye
जज |
^ 0 बृडौ दमा। vate) Baste) Cam) sfeten [ ¢ wary.
संधिः॥ QO प्रकृतिः बयः) wen ||? दृष्यित। 0 chee cfgau Rady (iii, 4 दसितं)। were (iii, 14 Thad) । लोपे" (iii, 24) तद्धन ° (iit, 26 दू च्छित) | mee (7, 8 इच्छितं)। कमचज० (ili, 34 इच्छ) ॥ ¶ 0 are adie छत ofa a aU a दूति स्थिताः सवन्ति। र्षा" (iii, 18 Phra) । wee (iii, 6 तीकं) । We (iii, 4 तसं) । Ue (ॐ, 14 तौखं) ] लेपे (iii, 24) तिन् (iii, 26 Paw) Mae (ii, 3 तिक्ं) ॥ ** 8 ल्िग्धं ॥ †{ Bae ॥
` (९) BD व here and afterwards. (2) BD waver (but see marginal । we
_ gloss). > (द्) B prefixes एवं बद्धौ ॥ (४) CD संयोगपरे॥ (५) A पवैखरूपद्य ॥ `, .
(९) ^ ण्वुः, Bom (७) 4 धनाडा, 3 wagi, CD घण्डा ॥ (८) B Saag (€) ^ ; द
. ` Sat, OD sara ॥ (९०) A aga, BC कन्नो, 1) कडव्जाड ॥ (१९) O'prefixes ` ` पवस्य ॥ (१९) C D place this clause before खत्वं ॥ (१द्) 0 7 सं सोगाच्तरे.॥ (९४) @
। "९0७8 WuyT (see ii, 2); C D profix the Sky. translations काय } aT’) tiga | ` तौच । athe | wg । खयः $ see also B in the marginal gloss. (qu) Baw ॥
(१९) ABCD दूज्कि्यं॥ (१७) A om. this and the remaining examples; ©... ॥ ।
सिग्बा॥ शट) Bisse. (see ili, 5. 9), ¢ 7 उड ॥ (९९) Baar
IL, 5- 7] ॥ खरविधानं दितौयं ॥ ९५
खरा ऽन्यो ऽन्यख स्थाने भवति ॥ *कातव्व(९ । tera) । gare | BOD) tage? घेनूए५)। नेपुर(<) 1 BCD कुचापि गच्छति) कत्थ). पि गच्छलि«) ॥ as wel” & 8 wage py ॥
ऋवणेस्य स्थाने aa) भवंति fe च aafa® 1 घुत eal) | wat araw’) । card रीसते(\५९) । शखछषिः(९०) दूसि८८) । प्रौ पुथकौ(९९) Tg”) FRY । PAY GERD) । उष्टं उको“ । ण fet (CD) ॥ । nen Owe एतः ॥ ६
Ba खाने ए भवति ॥ धवेतद्खो(\) । TAC । Fad । [वेर(९९, ॥ | 1
ETN अह्च.॥ ७]
भिय
#* ए कत्तव्य ॥ {7 स्हचौनां (२०)॥ {0 बद्या॥ ऽ वेताल्लः॥ || Caw ae केनापि Te a hi
(९) A ata, 8 aray, ¢ कायब्वं, D कायन्नं (see iii, 29 and Lassen Inst,
Prac. pp. 141. 865); CD add the following Skr. translations aN । Mora |
्यंगाराः ; see also B in the marginal gloss. (र) ^ quxd, 7) खद्णं ॥ (र) A
ame, Barat (४) ABD qo; D prefixes qq ॥ (५) ACD Buen (९) A
ऽ नेर, Baad, ¢ रवर, D Wet (७) ^ ०. (८) Aom., ए कर्यं वि, D कच्छ So Fah ( ABCD wert (Xe) 2 खरो ॥ (१९) Bom. | (६२) B reads इन्यखसे . ` भवति॥ (१९) ^ om. (६४) ABO Dad ॥ (qu) A arsy, Barsy, CD काकण Vo Dadds Ga प्रत्यय॥ (९९) ABC etaz, D दौसए॥ (६७) SoC; ABD ऋषि ॥ ~.“ QE) 8०.8.07; OD add यास ऋषिः वास द्रसौ ॥ (६९) ABCD पुद्धवौ ॥ (९०) A | BOD warn (९९) AB बङ्गा, CD बुद्ध ॥ (२९) A BD etn (रर) A fae, B वितं, 07 चविंटं॥ (९४) A Vary, 23 उदासा, C sae सं, D wa (see ili, 8). (२५) A Vain (२६) ^ एत् ॥ (२७) A FagT, B व्खद्ा, ¢ D Sax; CD prefix the Skr v, translations वतादयः | तलं । YHA} वर ; see also Bin marg. gloss रट) A. ~“: „ RU (९९) © 7 add war ए केष fa (see marg. gloss). (३०) MS. सुचना ॥
९& | ॥ सखरिधानं दितौोयं ti , [II, 8--11.
ta) स्थाने अद्(९) चर) भवति । Bea) azeafta । FO वद्र.) ॥ ॥ 8 uate श्रौतः ne a
stat!) स्थाने st) भवति ॥ stad!) । (\द)सोवद्लं(९५) ॥ 9 ५ aes €. | ` #
श्रौतः.) स्थाने अख च(५९) भवति ॥ Cast) । करवा ।
कला । (CD) ॥ ५ १५ ॥ एरेद्रसेया^<) विषन्नैनौयस्छ(र०) 4 ९० ५ एत् श्रोत् र लापा५९) feast wre भवेति ॥. कतरे(९९) गच्छति.) । fer?) । देवो । वंभणि । {पणर पि(९५) । ake । ए ९९) 1 RGA । aR । Zag | ` ॥ 11 ॥. Comentreneraret च स्यंजनद(र९) ॥ ९९ )
ie *O दौम्रूपः.॥ † 0 ब्राद्धणः॥ £C पुरर वि । (पनः अपि) | रु प्र्थषः Gi, 10 पनर अपि) | अप्यस्यार् अलोपः (ii, 18 पुणएरपि) । प्रथमस्य” (iii, 12 पणरवि) ॥ § .0 वधूः ॥
(१) ^+ 8 एत ॥ (२) Batu (द्) 0 om. B दृन्ययमारेणे ॥ (४) 0 रेखयै' ॥ (४) B `
८ 0 °रिच्ं॥ (ई) 7 बेर॥ (©) Bom.; CD add the example वे az, whereto 0 ` has the marg. gloss व स्फुटनिखययोः | (८) ^+ ऊर्, 7 उर्॥ (¢) Baran (१०) ‰ ऊर, 5, Dey (१९) C pref. Skr. Sree D arin (९२) A wad, D उसद्धं॥
: (१६) Copref. Skr. सौचलं, D सौवर्वलं॥ (१४) A Saad, Corey, 1) सोश्च ; . .
© 7 add the example ard Bre i (tu) B अया ॥ (१६) BCom. (१७) CD pref. Skr. सरः । कैरवाः | कौलाः ॥ (१८) 23 सउरि ॥ (१९) A eg, D न्पाः B (corrupt)
; “-. RITA याः॥ (Re) ग्नौवस्थान॥ (२६) B (corrupt) रदा Serer ॥ (xe) ABA, ee ॐ कादि ;' C D read wae and pref. शप. कतरः गच्छति ॥ (द्) Awe, BOD |. त्र “ma; CD add the example अतःपरं । Fast (२४) A feted, 8 तिन्तरू्वे, D .-
` “ fared; Cadds गोलजिणे (in marg. gloss वौ रजिनः), D arefart ॥ (२४) D qwefy; ©.
. ©D pref. Skr. पनः अपि; A om. this example ; B adds एतं fez (MS. एं fag) . st
(२९) Aom. (२९) 8 07 वदू; Cadds Skr. पतिः, 7 पति ॥ (रट) 4.2 बुद्धौ, D .
wet; © had originally बद्धौ, now it has been changed to ay; B © D place बह 1
aati (९९) A we, Baw (३०) ¢ D अद्ागमान् खार क्षा, om. च ॥ (३९) A भिञ्नमश्च 1 ee
: “ at a ‘ vot EEE “~ ¢
77, 12, 18°] ॥ खरविधानं fat ॥ ९७
(रच्रकारागमेऽनुसखारलेयै च asa भवंति ॥ taeda | , †सरिताणर । (CD) ॥ PaO. (CD) । BEM ॥ EO | fata । (CD) ॥ ॥ 19 ॥ Tf weaa™ ॥ ९२ ॥ Ofer agate वाच्यं ॥ **त्या । पाया । देवा | daar’) 1 OD ॥ | ॥ 18 ॥ बलोवच्(\२) चवुत्थीं ॥ ९2 षष्ठोव्च् ९९) चतुत्थौं gear ॥ taal) fare) । नमेा(५५) `गुरुण(*९ ॥
व स 5 aS os ee ध २.३ _ ~ ५ +<: 2 SS ५. इ _ ~ ~ 2 *.
SRC +e 3
` WISN 0704 र ॥ Sf 15॥ OD neta
ope * Cee gaman † 8 सरित् दूति wa तकारस्य ख saw ॥ ¢ सरित्। ee Oy श्यट्ागमः॥ [ Barafafa अच रेफलेपो नकारोऽनसारः (sic!) 1 Caaiqn ऽ oo yifaara रेफलापः (sic!) ॥ 0 श्ए्रस् ॥ || Bfarfa(ye) सलोपः॥ 0 fren 1 ' `-दु वयणे(१८) बहवथणं वख {्िविभक्तोए कटौ (९९) WaT । Te WA तवदपाया। वदामि “` देवाद्ध(९०) देवाणं॥ ** 0 warp पादा ।द्वो। ब्राह्मण्ण॥ = ft B नमे जिनायदूति + नमे गरवे रत्यज चतुय षष्ठो ज्ञेया ॥ ¢ नसः जिनाय । नमः गुरवे ॥
¦: 48) + adds भवनि, ¢ 7 read अकारागमानुखारलोपाखच॥ (९) 8 अरक् ॥ (र) | : A सरिमाणं, BCD afcarmn (४) B adds ta (eG ?, 866. App. ¢ 7), - ~. prefixes कन्, Wea, शिरसा +० कमं, Bd, facd respectively. - (४) ^+ सौमं ॥ > ५
„(९९ ने) 4.02 ०0. (e)Aom (र) 07 वचनेन ॥ (¢) OD pres * |
£ . ` सवासां ह्यादौ त्यदौनां च विभक्तौनां॥ (९०) 7? व०॥ (९१) A वर्मणा (see ii, 15). ९९) BOD om. (रद) Bust, D ष्ौव॥ (९४) OD रमा ॥ (xu) A जिरस्य, ए ~ ` जिनस्य, CD शिषस्सं ॥. (९९) ¢ 7 add war अरदंताणं॥ (६७) MS. सिरसि ॥ (८) MS. Safe ॥ (१९) MS. now has चल्थिविभन्तौए, om. egt ; but in the place of fry
न yellow pigment and can no more be made out, (९२०) MS. ate (cf. 1, 5)
ee and त्ति there were originally different readings, which are now obliterated with . ` ५ o (1
शय 1 स्वरविधानं fears ॥ (Il, 14—16.
५ ६4 ॥ भ gawen ॥ २४ ॥
Qyar वणः (रडकारजकारौ a) न भवति ॥ ¢ 7 । 7 ॥ । 16 ॥ चरबुखाशो बहलं ॥ ९५ ॥ ।
श्रनुखारस्य क्षचिल् लापो भवति | कचिद् carer) | कचित् wefan) | POD ॥ sare) । भमंजरार) । fags । PAC) । TIO । are’? । नईैदि(९२) team) । (CD) ॥ aa? । ata”) । (0 7) । eg 1 समिद्ध५५ ॥ ॥ 18 ॥ Are शादि“ # ९६ ॥
गा शब्दस्य गावि(९९) efa®™ भवति निपातेन ॥ Qa ।
arate) । गाकीं(२९) । गावीोए(९९) । गावौ । masa |
ie camara) । amare ॥
“hi Cana n FO me (cf note १०) { © wea ॥ ९ ¢ amt ) गावः or गाः | TE | गवा | Tis । ओः । गवि (see i, 9.) । गोभिः । गोभ्यः । गवां or गोनां । गोष ॥
(९) CD insert न (see iii, 16). (२) © कतवा, 7 gat: (द) OD read छकारनकारजकाराख aa न भवंति॥ (४) Bom. (५) ¢ 7 नो भवति॥ (@) CD “afadate (see App.). (©) 7 वंभणा ॥ (=) So A; B wget (see H. C. ii, 182).; CD read dearer (see H. C.i, 26) and add वचज्जर। (see प. C. ii, 189) ; 7 further 118 च्यागम ॥ (€) A om., B विबुष्या ; D has विन्द् with wate after it ¢ reads विदु which is explained in the marginal gloss as विंदुकः। yefa: tl
य. (९) Ag, 2 चुन्ना, 0 चु, 7 चृणे॥ (९९) 8० 4; 8 काजणं (argu? soo ii, ,: ` “ge 5), OD काकणं (see छ. ©. 2 27). (१९). काड, Bars (कतु P, see Lassen, , ` , 4. : 2. 865, घ. C. iv, 214). (रद) ८ D whe; D gives it as an example of @1q;.. explains it in the marginal gloss as नद्धो; originally the gloss had नंदि es
‘bat it has been corrected to नद्धौ ॥ (१४) Aom,, BC D ama ॥ (९५) OD om po ER
bat see App. (१९) A गावि, 7 गौ ॥ (ge) Dmaty (5) Bafa निपात्यते, 07 .... xa saat मवति ॥ (१९) Banfa, OD men (२०) A wats, 8 गाधि, D mate; ` “`
© 7 add wave । गाकौ । (९९) A Bom. (२९) AD arate, Barfaen (x8). A maife, Daman (Re) 7 गगरं ॥ (२४) D arate ; © D add arate ॥
क, ् न tals? a’ area म ee ee eee, a” ५ ig . ९
। श ब १.
1, 17-20.] ` ॥ खरविधानं दितोयं ॥ ९९
॥ 17 ॥ एवायं Vereaigar() ॥ ९३ ॥
@yq wet ug (चेय विय एते आदेशा भवेति ॥ गत्या एव @afa एद् । (मति we । ta Fal) । †सदिय(०) ॥
4 18 ॥ ape लेपः ॥ ६८)
अपि श्रसि a) एतयोर् se लापे aafa ॥ (“रो पि। Ward fa ld सि zen
॥ 19 ॥ ODe er aT ge कु द्ल(र९ कओ (५) fig वू्कालाय ९११ ॥ ६९ ॥ O°) पूवेकाला् (९८) भवंति ॥ वेदिनतु(\९) । {वदिन्ता(९० । Sega |
कट् । THAR । ¶मोत्तण(र्ट । {उंदिश्रोा(९४) 1 eg कणि** 1 CD ॥
~
॥ 20 ॥ सवथ ROsgreear >) ॥ २० ॥
# 2 तमेव ॥` {८5 सर्व॥ {BC वदिला॥ § Bayar C भुक्ता ( see note ९९ | BO wary TC wares). ** Bea wart
, (९) 4. 5 नङ ॥ (९) A cay विय, ? °चियेस् ॥ (8) Been (8) ABCD agn
(५) ^ C मद्. us, B az We, D om. whole example, .C prefixes Skr. मत्या एव ॥ (९) ^ तम्बेय, D त चेय ; 0 pref. Skr. तं एव, 7 तत् एव ॥ (७) 8० 8 ; A °धिय (faa? see p. 20, note xa), C ofa, D °चेय, ; ¢ 7? pref. Sky. स॒ एव ॥ (८) BCD अनयोर्, warat wate i («) ^ रापः स्यात्॥ (१०) A BOD fa; C D pref. Skr. transl. we
"gfx, छतम् अपि। लम् च्सि San (१९) A कयं पि, 5 कयं पपि, 0 7 कयं बि ॥ (९२) AGN
(९९) CD add तुखाण ॥ (yg) Dw; C D add वि॥ (९४) 67 om., but add णि afar (१९) ६० 4. ; BCD-om. (९७) BD om. (tc) BC पूवकालेऽ्थं ; C adds त्वा. taaa आदेष्टा भवंति i (९९) A वंदित, Bafen; ¢ D add wa वि जिद चंदं |
fear सवान् अपि जि्नँ्रचंद्रान्॥ (९०) ॐ व॑दौत्ता) (९२९) A gar, CD wart (xR) D
मातं ॥ (रद) ¢ मेत्तण, D drag or HrgW?; CD ४00 arsary, see App. (Re)
on ^ दिवं, D dee; 0 7 900 वंदेवि ॥ (९५) Awe क० 8 एषं क० ; CDom, this |
example. (eg) ^ Sa 7 अल्ल ॥ (२७) A te, Bee (२८) MS. भाक्ता
Re ॥ स्रविधानं दितौयं ॥ (II, 21, 22.
aaa”) एतौ प्रह्ययै.र₹) भवतः.) ॥ ` “जडाले५ जडिल्लो<) । फडाला) afar”) । (CD) ॥
॥ ‰1 ॥ ताताव(< तावतः ॥ २९ ॥
तावच् arc’) ता तावौ(५९ भवत्ः ॥ ( © 7 ) ॥ ता^ fafega’®) गणं ताव fea? जलदो (९५) fa गंभोरा | ता(१६)1गुरुञ्रा(५०) सुरसेला (५८ MRC CO (९०) जाव लिन्लंते८९९॥९॥
॥ ‰ ॥ उपमाने पिव इव विव ee ear जदा(*“) वत; ॥ २९ ॥
उपमानाथे (९५) ag) शब्दश एते श्रादेशा श्रवति ॥ fq?) ष पिव । चमरमिव | टैकमलं विव ase) सुदं । fret विय । ८ सायरव्व(२“ |
11
* ¢} तावत् fratu गगनं . तावत् एव जलधयः .च गंोराः। यावत् गरः THe
% चाराभिः न यावत् wean FC Ne! गुरः Cargo (ii, 10 wes) | खरो । (i, 4 Wes) | प्रथमेकवचनं सिद्धं॥ { Owed) अनसार aq (ii, 15). § C तव सुखं कमलवत् (३९) ॥
(४) ए ०. C D add are zal (६) Aom. (9) ^. स्थः ॥ (४) © D prefix Skr. translations जटामान् | फटावान् ॥ (४) A जडाज्ञा ॥ (९) 5 जडो, and places ६, ५. (७) A wetat; B orig: फंडालो,. but corrected to Ware i (=) B wheat. placing =, ७9. (€) ¢ D read: ता-ताव-जा-जा्वास, तावद्यावतोः॥ (१०) ¢ D add यावच्छन्दस्य तु ॥ (९९) 0 Dadd जाजावो ॥ (१२) A वच्छिन्न, 0 7) विच्डिषं॥ (१) A
‘fee, OD faa (९४) ठ लपद्िफि ॥ (९५) ^ व, Bf, CDan (१९) 07 ना; A om. this line. (ys) D गस्च्ा ॥ . (६८) B सुरसंण ॥ (१४) 8 घौ रोहि, ५. m. (२०) OCD Wi (२९) 8 जा तुलिच्जति, 0 7 जाव लिच्जंति॥ (२९) 2 विथं॥ (९९) D च (see H. C. ii, 150). (९२४) 8 शा (516). (२४) A om., & wana, D उपमार्थे; ए adds
fava fea वियंव्वव ङ्द्दा॥ (ke) ^ वच् ee, Cag, Darn (Rx) ^ 8 बं०; 017 |. ` prefix the Skr. translations yeaqa| चमरवत् (1 MS. चमर वत्)! wae 1 qa साशरवत्त् (1) सावर्वत्)) शेषस्य वत् ॥ (२८) ^ तुज्ज, 8 तुम्ब ॥ (Re) 0 fara, D fare -(द०) D सायरच्छ, ^ ख्दापरुच; B Breer ॥ (et) MS, कमलल विव ॥
7, 28-%6.] ॥ . खरविधानं feats ॥ २९
RaQ a *ए(९ फणो ge® भाति) जसे जा at ॥ + 2 ॥ श्रोलभ्(<) श्रवाप्यः ॥ २३ ॥ | च्व ्रपयोः स्थाने RO) भवति ॥ श्रवहसित॑( श्रोहसितं(« । श्रपसरित(९* श्रासरित(\९) । satan?) श्रोवरश्रो(\२) ॥ ॥ 24 nwa) |W ॥ ९६ ॥ †खलुशन्दस्य खुर् weet भवति ॥ 07 । एवं ख जंतपौलणणं ॥ # 25 ॥ ते कन्तंमानाे(९९) ॥ २५ ॥ | | यो वर्तमानकालायै(९०) शरान waa’) तस्याथ तकारो भवति ॥ ae भिद्यमानं) fas । कथ्यमानं कथिन्नंतं() । agar) ` साव्नत(९९) । ^ ॥ | 026 ॥ CUR सवार wae ॥ ९६ ॥ | gga छब्दस्य स्ीसु(२५ faufag’?) a) भवति ॥ OD ` निसामेय(९ युयं fama) 1 CD । भे भेणनि gary wala | “भे कतं(९) लया adi CD u
ध Be „ #¢ रष (फणः) तव भाति aw ३{खवत्(९९)॥ {Cae दति aad farqare ॥ :. , { © dated u |
a ea 119६ संखा जद्धा c. m. (६) ABD उलम् ॥ (७) 8 चचार् ॥ (८) > 0 अवद्ासितं ॥ (€)
ध .:. 4.9 ऋष्दसिष्ं, ¢ यादासिच्य, 1) उद्दसियं, B adds अपद्सितं ओदहसिद्यं॥ (१०) Boom.»
: ^ (९१) ABC Graefes, D watts nn (१९) A अववरकः, 8 अपचरकः॥ ` (६२) ? व्यच ps SD उबर (qe) + 3 खलः 7 खलो ॥ (९५) Be gail पोलणं॥ (१९) A ०साने
git: (९) 070०. काल; 2 मानल काला्थं॥ (पठ) ? प्रत्ययस्यार्थ, om. wn |
(ee) A fraurd, B भिधमानं, 0 Wye. (२०) A athe, BO Daten (९९) B “om. (९२) 8 सेदि (88) C D place this siitra after i, 25 (¢. ९. after i, 25> of ~. their own reckoning; see App.C 0). (९४) B सुखदः wen (२५) BC D add
¦ „ प्रएफत ॥ (९०) AB aa, OD कथ. .(९९) MS, Go tt
= QATH (२) 0 येस॥ (द). रद्द॥ (५) .^.3 07 भाद॥ (५) Dea; CD.
fen (९९). adds Wear (९७) BATH (२८) 0 7 ० ॥ (९९) 8० 0 ; ^ 86. | 4 . : :
RR ॥ खरविधानं दितोयं ॥ Il, 27- 29 ५ 27 ॥ (चक्ष ऽपि) ॥ २७५
waa कब्दस्यापि wig विभक्रिषु मे भवति) ॥ 07 10 | नडेन") भणे Haga) वयं युश्नान् सेहेन(९) भणामः । 0 \ इतय् श्रथः । 7 ॥
॥ 27. - 9 § COD ॥ ९७-इडन ॥ ; 28 ॥ eRe श्यः ॥ श्ट + ॥ दति शब्दस्य दय श्रादेशो भवति ॥ za) एवं ॥ ४ 29 ॥ भारे चलः(* yee | ` arava ®) त्तणः(९०) प्रत्ययो भवति ॥ (\४गामन्तणं । नयरत्तण (९२) |p
291 CD ॥ ee
` ` # प्र ॥ इति (र्शओोचडक्ृतप्रातलकणे.*५) Waraeri'® fae अमाप्त^)॥२॥ . / |
~ tinea etna ert
"~--+-----~-----~---~--------------~--~~---~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~- aaa Aaa raat ica taeda aaatateaietaaaen ima a)
(१९) ¢ D place this sttra after i, 81 (४, e. after i, 31% of their own -: : reckoning, see App. CD). (र) CDadd¥wargi (द्) A om. the whole
_ commentary, inatead of which it has wen (#) CD णेदेण॥ (४)8भनमे॥ | , , € 8 ०0. (७) ^ दूव॥ @ABRWI (€). 4 भावे्यं॥ (१०) ^ नण, ए तन॥ | (९९) OD pref. the Skr. translations araw wre: | नगरस्य भावः॥ (१९) 8070: :4 was, OD add क्रौन्थेकरस्य भावः तित्वयर तशं ॥ (\द) A om. from ¥ to wae ॥ (१४) an Bewaey (९४) Bom ata G8). A धानमग्रद ॥ (49) A ०४१.
पा, 1-8.] ॥ व्यंजनविधानं ठतोयं ॥ 7 ९२
“She
॥ 777 ॥ अथ व्यजनविधानम् आह ॥ ३। ah pare खीर Bra yey
Oe ear) यकारवकारौ aa safaat लोभ भवतः ॥ gat goad) दद्यते( waa । Cage विंद्मलो(*९) | fast’) जिद्मा(९२ ॥
` # ‰ ॥ COsqeet aja) ne ॥
` शवसेभ्यः(१९) ag?) व्यंजनं Sra भवति ॥ (\८खयं सयं । खर(९९)
\,. सग्गं । श्रोतं सेतर््व॑^) । काव्यं APY) । wei) सलं । विल्वं(९९)
„` विलं wei) ससं । चुतं सुत(९५ । शेरा सिद्मा(९९ | | ॥ 3 १ wR) ys ॥
aa) च परे तल् Sra) waa? ॥ शक्रः(९९) । सन्ता(९९) ॥ रज
। wi) । CD दुग्धं दुद्धं । afta) Sha (टं कष्तं(९५) ।
क्ष, ~ „ (९) ^ दा॥ (A atl (a) D ararr ॥ (४) A om. comment हात् to भवतः ॥ + ae 4) 7 om., © दादकाराद्ू ॥ (&) 8 परभावे स्थिती i (७) Bom., CD RawAT,A THES ॥ (८) 4 Bom. (¢)Aom., B eee, ¢ gay, D ट् उभार ॥ (१०) A om. , this example. (१९) B fase ॥ # (१९) A om. (१२) B farat i (९४). 0 D qo tl :" ` ` {६४ B adds लयं ॥ (१९) A एतेभ्य ; Bom. wae to भवति ॥ = (ठ) The examples | “are rearranged ; their order in A is २०, २१, ९६, ९५, om. all the others; B has. RO, ९९. RB ९९, ९२ RB ९४, २५, ९९; 0 7 have ९८, ९९, ९४, २०, RL ९९, RB ९९, OM. : . ` २४ (see iti, 9). (Re) A © Srey, 3 Sree ( corrupt for सो्नव्वं ), D Sree ॥ (२९) ` ^+ are, Dare (२४) CD सस्यं ॥ (२५) A सों, B छुं; C D om: this example. (९९) C fama । (९९) Bom. (रष) 8 वग्न ॥ (९९) B guj (२०) BC D read ` बमोपरेयत् पूवे व्यंजने तल् लार भ ॥ | (RR) A सुकला, B war (ee) B शतत, D सन्ने; “oe (द) Badds ami at; 0 7 800 रूक्गं स्तं ॥ (२४) 7 ब० ॥ (a) ? van
९४ ॥ वयंजनविधानं हतोयं ॥ 1, 4—6.
ware aot | Vay anit षण्मुखः(र) कुहा) । श्रात्मा५) श्रप्पा । उत्पलं उप्यलं । सद्भावं सद्मावं । +मन्मयः Aa) । प्राप्तं पत्तं । "प्रद्यु wera) | Tat wat) उल्का उक्ता । भास्करः wt । BCD ब्रह्मा वन्दा ॥ a4 ॥ छर वीयं 9 + aire?) ओ) परे लोप्यं भवति ॥ ठ्ः(१९) ged । Oar खमा । संवत्सरः ` संवच्छरा । मत्सरः मच्छर । Ta) ger | ईक्षितं इच्छित ॥ ` _ ॥ 5.॥ aire aw | धू ॥ | वग्गोात् परं wa वयजनं Are) भवति ॥ सौख्यं सुक्लं(९९) । Oem:
wat Cait कोयो । (विष्वं fat fag fea । 8 0 ॥ os pen (च् च aa arn en | | वग्गेपरः शरण. च वग्गेपंचमेा वा लयो भवति ॥ ज्ञानं नाणं(९९) | । ६ ध
Re जन्तं (९२) । eae) लक्खणे । Oegt लच्छी । 0 7 1 2 07 ।. (९९) छृष्णं कष्टं ॥
* 0 कामः ॥ + ¢ earn
(९) 8 7 दप ; Aom. this and the following examples, except Nos.e,y
— andti (२) 5ष्टनोषन्रा॥ (9) Avena (2) A कम्वा, Beat; BCD . a place ३, ४, ९॥ (४). Berar ॥ (६) B wart, © D aati (©) 0 7 पव्जणा, and. add at: वग्गो ॥ (८) ^ ब्रा वद्या, 5017) व॑भा॥ (®).^407से, Bari (९०) 8 © .. se
| ` : 7 चतत यंजनं॥ (१९) A Bath (१९) B वक्ा ॥ (९६) A om. the remainder. ` : . (५४) Barge, 7 अप्या (WW) 0 chee, BD xfer (१९) Aw BD सुखं ॥
ॐ. (१७) B क्लीवा कंवा ॥ (६८) D reads बिध्वं विडं सितं सिद्धं (ace. sing. of विधः सित 9 ति (¢) BOD fat (ee) ACD सा, स rai (९९) A BC D ure (8०० iii, 19), . . (९९) A om, this example. (९६) Baw (२४) A ctr, 2 लक्षणयः॥ (९५) B ee
om, this example. (&&) A tat वन्द्, B sat ge, 0 D प्रन que
Be ५ क MEET
III, 7—9.] ॥ amafaert eaten Ry
॥†7॥ दौ ३.९॥७॥# ्
दकारः (वकारे परे लेषो वा भवति॥ द्वारं वारं। वेति fa ze ॥ ॥8॥ षार्टः॥८॥
षकारात् VTE टकारो वा) Bret भवति ॥ उल | gar) ।
Gee Gz ॥ Cag’) «उक ॥
॥ 9 ॥ (ग रेफः gy च॥ € ॥ Cesare व्य॑जनात् परः gaan’? च रेफा जणो भवति ॥ तत्रं
.तक्कं a श्रक्घो । म॒खः मुवसो (५५) । Waite: निग्गो हे (९९) । सगं सगं । ओघः शिग्घो(५९)। श्रध; ्रग्धो(९८)। श्चैनं(\८) speed) वं वन्जं(९०)।
दुजेनः दुल्नणो । we: GRY | सुवणं सुवं । was सन्तु?) । aah का- तव्व(९२) | कर्दमं कदुमं QO) we) प्रवर्ः(९९) पवरे(९०) ¢ Di सपः wut । विभ्रमः विद्ममेा। दभैः दद्मो । ard aC") धर्मैः घमो 1 खयः सुच्जो । बतं aa । पवतः पव्बतो(९०) । चुतं GACY 1 खः दसो । ¢ 1) ॥
(९) 07 00 च।॥ (९)? वकारपरे। (2) दार; 07) 00 देर दवार ॥ (४)
we; C D om. the remainder. (©) 3 कुड (? we) (८) 4. 011., 8 places ८, ©
o ` ®) A ०. ; B ufae, repeating want before it. (९ ) B om, the sutra; A tas .“ ` “OD रेफ ॥ (१९) B om. commentary, up to भवति ॥ (९९) D पव्बस्य अख ॥ ` (va) ^ गप. this example; D places it’before तक्र ॥ (tg) A मख, B wagr ॥ `, , . (९4) A om. the remainder. (१६) ¢ D fae ॥ (१७) B Wrath (१८) D adds wa
TET (५९) B om., up to सुवं 1101. (२०) D repeats asqil (९९) C खदा, and CD add ter डाढा॥ (९२) Bae tt (रद्) BC D कायव्वं, and place this example
^. ` , pefore-the preceding one. (९४) B चद, CD we; but C has a marginal . correction in pencil as ॥ (२५) Berg, Cee, Deg (Rg). C प्रषरा, with
marginal correction in ‘pencil aq: # (२७) 2 प्रवरो, D पचरा ॥ (9c) B wa, C
os SS, D Si, (seo HL ©. ii, 56). (Re) Ba, OD वयं॥ (Re) BCD werarn co’ (82) SoB; CD aan | |
4
BCom. (६४) 0 7 wad (see iii, 29 and App. C D in iii, 8), Bugrén (९) ए. +
^". कितया) । पि fears । जटा जडा । शते कद्) । प्रति", ' OS” fag पडिसिद्धः । OD 1 Cong ge ॥ ` ध ` ४ ike देः (ण्याय 8१३४ ` |
Oo". a fag’, B विजयते, CD खिद्यते ॥ (११) AB मिच्जर, CD fear; of HO. 7, ` ' po 28s and as to च्न for कंभा, see p. 20 footnote 28 ; p. 10, n. 7; p.27, ०. 18} p. 80, ` ` । a | . 1.7, (<x) Bear, Carer, Deer (षद्) + 807 ख्डरा॥ (१४) ^ wer, 8. :: नादो; © 7 read enfeare: ्ाद्णादा ॥ (१४) A has only the following comment, ,
ge | पिश्ाचौ पिखाज ; om. all the rest. (१९) 8 तोथैकरः॥ (९७) B तिव्कसे, 9 `.
श्र Bare aad 1 ।] 1 ४ १9 Weer ween 1 ११ ४
co ", 670०. (४) A fags, B fags, © Faget, 7 फिक् ॥ (५) A om. this example .. () CDegtn (७) D adds Gait (see ii, 10, 19). (=) ABC परषं, D que ॥
शद ॥ व्य॑जनविधानं ठतोयं ॥ (III, 10—13. Hoag yp (वक्षया पुर +
अरत ऊद्धं ये व्यंजनारेणम् ते श्रसंयागस्य भवंति we at) wap wut ॥
yi प्रथवद्धितीष्यीत दशौ १९ a
aviret प्रथमद्वितीययोः स्थाने यथासंख्यं दितीयचतुथौ' श्रादेशो) भवतः ॥ भास्करः भक्छरो । frye: निच्छयो) । Wes दुद“) । (५ स्तन्न:
` धंभो) । gag) फरसं(«) । fra” विजयते । Oger ere’?
मथुरा मधुरा(५२) । नाथः नाधो) ॥ | | [ 2: OD # १९५ ४ ay
(“ore wrt aatat भवति ॥ va एगं । ayant
(रदकार घकार धकार भकारं (९९ खाने कारे waa) ॥ : `.
(१) CD om. this stitra and its commentary. (x) Awa, Baath (द) 5 ।
(९) A wed, B पुरुसं, ¢ परिखं, D परिखा; 8 0 7 add wa we (s00 iii, 18), (९०) ~
तिच्क्गय ॥ (१८) Batu (xe) B प्रतसिदं ॥ (९०) Conjectural; ए कच्छे, © Dom. this example.’ (२९) © D om. ख (see note ¢in iii, 11.). (२२९) © 7 om, खट; र ॥ . = (ररे) B oware इत्येतेषां ॥ (९४) A om. comm., up to भवति ॥ `. . "~` rhs my
० । of 18 ॥ aawe yeast
II, 14—17.] ॥ ्यंजनविधानं दतौयं ॥ ९७ .
(ge सुदं । Ste ने । (रमधवः मद्व । टषभः(र) वसद ॥
॥ 14 ॥ सख दाः ॥ ९४ ॥ Oana सथाने wae) भव॑ति ॥ faa भिक्ला | षणः SHS | पषाणः great । दश दद ॥ . .
Wied Seren प्र्प् + Oya स्थाने जकारो भवति ॥ यौवनं जुब्वणं । qa सुच्लोा याचा HAT ॥ |
॥ १५० OD» १५४ ॥
„ ५
Pat ॥ aaa स्थाने aay भवतः(०)\ यथासंख्यं ॥ fal fared?) 1
` ` (रपथ्यं पच्छं(९२) । विद्या विन्ना । Oster da!) ! ` न्यं न्(९४) ।
स्थितः ठितो(९५ । (\९)दंडः ger) दग्धः) दङो(*<)। CD । धान्यं ye?) । 0 7 ॥
aye चख Om ॥ १७ ॥ यश्मत्संबंधिने यकारस्य (“तकारो भवति(९२) ॥ gefett? ॥
१ र SD ॥ ९७ ॥
(x) C Dom. this example (see p. 26, note ९ in 7, 11). = (र) A om. this
“example. ( ९ ) 4 ठ दषमेा॥ (४)8सप्यय्दा॥ (५) A °च्छ्०॥ (€) A has only” "सटः पालारौ्वीदाणो । दण दद, om. the rest. (९) 2 षद्द्ा ॥ (=) BD मदा ॥ ६ oh (¢) A. only स्प, om. the whole commentary. = (९०) A only Mw, om. up fo “me (१९) 0 7 fad (१९) B dar with Ske. darn (५६) BD demir; ¢
_. originally dst, with marginal correction "ङ्का ॥ (९४) CD ae ॥ (qu) A fear,
(^ BCD fear (१९) A om. the remainder. (१७) B दटा, 7 eet; (35) BC
८ : ag par Red ike. ५ ५.१
warn (१९) 8 रो, Cogs, ण्डो ॥ (Re) Baad, 7 षां ॥ (gx) Bue (eR) fk
५. ` Aom, upto wafa ॥ . (९९) A qufe, 8 quife; C 1 add कयं | य्॒मानिः BN ae ।
र्ट ` ॥ व्यंजनविधानं टतौयं ॥ (III, 17-.. 22. |
# 18 ॥ श्छ. इ; ॥ ९८४
(र)रेफशकारषकाराणं (र) स्थाने (“सकारा भवति ॥ भिरं) aes (Oaat wat) | श्रामिषं श्रामिसं(९) ॥
b 19 ॥ goer eran? ॥ १६ ॥
(रहजथार्नां खाने wat) भव॑ति । aude ॥ we ats Cart al) 07 । eC) खंभो ॥
॥ 20 + ऋश्हार॑ geen!’ 1 २० ॥.
COacerat em awa’) भवंति । यथासंख्य ॥ (°)गदं att aa aes । OD) Sarg at OO 07) ॥ =` अ 91 ॥ अंड्दार्ना८९२) अद्छभाः(९*) ॥ ९९ ॥
(\९)मडदानां wa”) यथाक्रमं वलभा भवंति(९९) ॥ wae `
Be AERO ten) Brea) | Ofer fat 07 ॥ ; ` ध
+) 4 22 ॥ COegte sere a Re il
(९°)यकारवकारयोर् व्यल्यासा(९८) भवति(९<) ॥ gaia : परह्लंको(९०) |
(2) Boatn (3) A only tap (३) 5 ग्सकारष०॥ (2) ^+ सस् ATA (2) B faci (६) ८ सौ ॥ (©) A om. thisexample. (८) 0 7 रण०॥ (€) BOD om. this clause. (१०) 8 जानं, ¢ 7 शाकं ॥ (१९) D wat (स यभो, see iii, 11). (१२) A Baan, 23 नसा, 1 age ॥ (२२) A only यथास्य भवंति we (१४)
, - .. ` Bawet, 7 घणभा॥ (५५) 4 न्वोरं॥ (१६) Bawah (९७) ABCD ogi;
but C with marginal correction e@jh (१८) 8 ब ॥ (९९). "हाणां; but BC
oo ण्डानीं॥ (R°)B Dom. (2%) A only GB, om. up to भवे (ex) AB श्योा॥ ` oo. (९६) A Came, Bawer, D वमद ॥ (२४) 587 गणः ^ 28 ड {0"ड॥ (WB. A :. `: Breen (xg) SoA; Bom. stitra; © Dread पवयोार्॥ (९७) ६० A; 23 यवयेार् ; `. ` ` एष G:D पवयार्, see below note २९. (२८) ^ अत्ययं ॥ (re) ^ स्यात्; MCD, : here follows the example पाप पाव (see ili, 12 10 App. CD), after which comes...
& new sttra -रसयोारः व्यत्यासः, to which are assigned पय्येकः etc, as examples. | (see App. © D). (Re) AB कः ; C D add पय्थारं पज्ञाणं ॥ una
ITI, 23 —25.] ॥ व्ंजनविधानं gate ॥ ९८
MAE) वेदुलियो(९) । satan Ae! Ose wat) । CDi
1 28 ॥ weate’) Bra नणलानाप् श्रघौ OBrowerar©) स्थितानां ॥ १३ i नणमार्ना संबंधिनौ यौ met तयोर लेपे हकारागभे भवति । Ome °)ऽपदादाववस्यितानां ॥ म्रञ्जः पन्दो(\९) । दष्णा तण्दा(५९) । यस्मात् AD) । > 0 7) । CDi (*छह्नातिं froefa । ब्धः aay’) । fare fart?) । Bo (\नअपदादाव् दति किं । sama’) मसानं ॥ । ॥ 24 ॥ रेपे दिलं ॥ ९४॥ | .. संयोगाक्षरस्य लोपेऽवणेषख(९०) दिलं भवति(९९)॥ (र९)दुग्गौ gar! BCD । ara ave ॥ ॥ 2६ ॥ (र्रक्षचिड् were ऽपि 1 २५॥ Qatar अलेपेऽपि fet भवति ॥ न ज्ञायते न(९५) नच्जते(९९) । (“वाध्यते वादिज्नते(र,) ॥
a (१) A om.*this example. (२) C D वेड्यः॥ (द) B वै -द्लि्यो, 0 aafear, D ; ` .येरल्िख ॥ (४) 7 बक्लो॥ (४) 8० 8 ; AC D qoy (६) A om. हा ॥ (७) Conjectural ; ‘the MSS reading is corrupt; B throws‘stitra and commentary into one and .. “ ०९०8 We ला० HAYS अधा Tea Qa डा भवति ; ^ 123 ऽपादावस्यानानां ; C originally 4 . : न पदावस्थानानां, corrected in margin to ऽपदादावम्धानाना; D पद्दावस्थनानां॥ : ee ( a (ae ACD सकारदकारे ॥ (¢) Bom. this clause. (१०) Conjectural; A 7 read ““ इषद्दाविस्थानानां, © अपदावस्थानारनां ॥ (१९) CD quer (१२) B तिषा ; A adds ^ छन्नः wet (see App. BCD). (१२) 4 7 ser (९४) A om. the remainder, , upto खंपदाद्ाव् ॥ (१५) Buqufa, 0 7 गिण्दड् ॥ (१९) 0 7 awet; B places -: , ` # 8 example after निन्द विया (see App. 2). (xe) C 7 place the examples thus ` १९, ९९, ९४, ९९, ९३, ९७. (१८) 3० ~ ; 4. ष्यपादा विति, 8 अपादाःति°, D wyeretafe tt (९९) BOD waren (Re) 7 विशेषस्य ; Badds व after it. (२९) A स्थात् ॥ (ek) 0५ 0 -दुमेः SA (९) 4 om. the शध, . (Ra) B वचिददुलोापे?॥ (२५) Co. 070 र॥ (२६) AB was, CD wat; ¢ 7 244 we तज्ञं॥ (९९७) -8 ज्ज "+ „ OD ग्न्नर ॥ |
श्रु न i ॥ “Boos * ae
1 ट _ (“पदादाव् दति किं । (\९भद्रः wat?) ॥
4.0 29 ॥ कचि अन्यापि ॥ २९ ॥
| ॐ 5.७ to गनो 0 ग्रो), and App. 0 D, iii, 16. (१९) B farer ॥ (१९) 80 4; - 7
i = ; ak latter is also the reading of © D (see App. BCD), (१४) B watt अक्ता ॥ (qu). os Bee (१९) Curarar ॥ (१७) Badds ae HET ॥ XL) A om. this example; .
३० | || व्यजनवपिधानं ठतोयं il [ IIT, 26—29.
॥ wa ae
४ 26 $ afer Sateagdah: प्रयमद्टतौयौ a ९६
तस्मिन् दिले वर्तमानयोर् दितौयुचतुथेयोः wa’) saat भवतः ॥ सौख्यं we । Cg श्रग्धो । पथं qs) ere) ` ast) षष्ठः get 1) agi वुङो(<) । are wet) | वधेमानः ` वद्धमानो५५९.। gay पष्फं। forget faa? 1
G4) a @ eaedet 1 ९७ i
अन्येषां (\२)सुक्रासुक्तविशेषाण्णं fea स एव भवति ॥ (aa श्रक्षो । सत्यं ae) | BOD ॥
दादौ(\९) दिलं न . भवतिं ॥ कोधः wr?) । Cag: खुदो (५९) | & a
कचित् पदमध्येऽ्वसाने ९ च लोपे ad fed न भवति ॥ aa) ` कासवो । (\गवेश्रवणः वेसवणो(९५)। gO ge Hagia `;
(९) A ग्चतुथायोफ न्तु ॥ (२) 8० 8; B संयोगात्; CD संयोगायो॥, « (६) A Stag (for rag? but see iii, 5). (४) A om. the remainder. (४) 8 .पंयं ; ` : so also © now ; but originally © seems to have had gg) (६) 7 साध्या ॥ (७). | Dest, Beart (८) 3 कटरा, Dweri. (¢) B gt, C ost, D o8rn (ge) 7). ,. WRT (१९) B दद्धमाणे, C वडमाणा, D वदुमाणा (for age); but comp. App. A, .
| Boriginally सक्ताविगेषाणां+ but corrected by later hand into चुक्तविशेषाणां ; the. - : ` (५९) 5 खषा, D खदो ॥ (९०) 5 ¢ पादादाव् ॥ (२९) ^ भद्रा, Dwg ॥ ` (९९) A भदा, . `
7 8 भशि ॥. (र्द) 8०.0 ; A sara, BD अवशाने॥ (२४) A कास्यपः ॥ (२५) 8. कैश्वणे ॥ (२९) Degen (९७) Awe, Dae ॥ ।
III, 30—33.] ॥ airafaert ठतीयं ॥ ३९ ,
`कातव्व॑(^) । HO) AR® । दीर्धः Ati (“उक्छष्टं vat ॥ ॥ 50 ॥ सयोगसयेष्टखदागमौ अध्ये ॥ 8० ॥ |
इयोर् (?व्ंजनयोर् मध्ये इष्टखरागमे भवति ॥ शरधिः श्रमणो) । विक्षेषः विसलेसे | (‹)सक्तः पलक्ो । Ova cae) । वषे afzd | CDi a: afer) । (र्रःसर्षपः after) | (पदवद् यैः(९५) वेदुलियो(५९) । Oe far । “खच्छं सुमे) । “पद्म wea । 0 7 ॥ | ॥ SL ॥ यत्रयोद्९” इदुतौ ॥ २९ ॥ : ` eC) स्याने (र९द्रकारोकारौ भवतः ॥ चयोदश्र Are । 2 OD भवति दति) ॥ , “४ 32 ॥ (रदंस्यायास् (रतिध्रयोद् लोपः ॥ २९ ॥ ` (र)संख्यायाः (दरसवंधितिश्योर् लेपे भवति(९९) ॥ (विशतिः वोसा ।
„ पंचाशत् पन्ना. ॥ of 88 ॥ eS दद् ॥
vol. @&) +^ ससा, Baten (४) 4 ०, this example. (४) Board, CD wad “~. (see di. 8). (¢) B repeats ware after ao (७) 8 खगि॥ (८) A विश्लेष 4... (€) ^. ०. this example; BCD place it after @fcarn (१०) BCD रयफुं ॥ oe > (yay A वरिषं॥ (१९) AD खरि, BC aca (शद). Bom. this example; , ve = ‘probably by oversight ; as it is the only instance of B omitting what occurs vin AO D together. (१४) 4.5 67 सरिसवा; 07) 80 वद्धं वदूर्॥ (१५) 0.7 ` ` वेदयः ॥ Qt) + वेदुलिख, B वेदुःलिा, 0 बेरलिथा, 7) वेदलिख; CD add wai vo fet ॥- (९७) &० 4; 0 7 खमा ॥ (१८) 8०0? ; 2 सुसं ॥ (९९) 2 पडमं, CD “ :" ` पमं 1 (२०) ^. य॒वूयोर् ॥ . (२९) BC 7 वकारवकारयोः॥ (२२) 807 द्दुता॥ ` (8) A tice; B om. by mistake, as it gives only चया, omitting eq and तरद ॥
(९) BCD wre; 0 adds कावं॥ (२) A WH, BW, CD Wei ` ` Ee
ms (xz) ABC दाद; D ष्टायादू (86) ; A B place the examples २४, शद्, but CDR, | 9 : a .. २४॥ (२४) D repeats संषटया॥ (२६) B Fae.n (२७) Dom. (९८) © संबंधिनोः fae ॥. ` es : 4 , ARC) ^ ख्यात् ॥ (Re) A, om, all examples, probably by mistake, (९) 6 TUT At et 9
RR ॥ ्यंजनविधानं eaten = [TIT, 34--37.
(रसंस्यासबंधिनस् तक्रारसखय(९) q® art भवति ॥ dadaraq) (ई)पणपणस ॥ | ॥ 34 ॥ Ceredteet: खरे ॥ २४ ॥
ककारस्य वगैढतोयस्य च खरे परे लापो भवति ॥ arian) area’) । anf atest (रराज af. (<प्रतिकूलः पट्कूला(९२) । नदौ az) । BIC D ॥
t 95 ॥ ad wae » ३५ ॥
(र<)ककारवगैढतोययोर् wae परे यत्वं भवति॥ CDi काकाः काया। नागा; नाया.) | BC Du
` # 36 ॥ शिष्योगाद् ere ॥ ददै ॥
erent are). भिष्टमयोगात् श्ञातव्या(९८) ॥ श्रकंः श्रो । `
` gd: खरियो(\५ । भिका भिक्ला । wea लब्डौ५९९)। CD ॥
॥ 87 ॥ न Arar soda? cot) रेफस्य ॥ ३७ ध
(९५० (रो507 कख (रो 507 भ | (9) 4 होप, ण, भवति ॥ = `
(५) B पर॑ चाशत्, and prefixes विं्ति वौसा, repeating the latter by mistake from __ the previous ध, (६) A पणएपणस, BD aura, 0 पणवखा ॥ (७) 0 Dhavean ` -
| altogether different stitra and commentary, see App. © D. (ल) Inserted; A B
om. (£) This example also occurs in D (see App. © D).. (९०) A कोकिला ॥ | if
(१९) ^ कोद्ख ॥ (१९) A om. thisexample. (49) B वनराजौ TUTE ॥ ( १९४) A.
cote adds Fat नेउरः। कूपः Far (MS. क्रूप AW); B addsmany more examples, 868 , .
05 App. 8. (९४) 0 वः, D aa; A adds aarceataar ॥ (१९) 8०2 ; A corrupt: `. : "` -.शवरोपरयोरेफयाभपरमोय्यलं स्यात् (WAT परे EAT यलं स्यात् ?); but 0 7 read’.
differently, see App. C D. (१७) CD शया ॥ (१८) AB गम्यानां ॥ (१९) So A; aa
BOD sai, (२०) Aom,the remainder. (९९) BOD @ftar. (९२) Here C D श. terminate this chapter, see App. © 2, (रद्) D eda (ke) Bom ऽधो रेफस्य ॥ `. 4
TS se BR & >
ITI, 38. 39*.] ॥ व्यंजन विधानं ठतौयं ॥ द्रे
(एश्रपभरंगेऽधो रेफस्य लेपो न भवति tara’? | यरामो(र) | Maret
. धसि५ जादि॥ ` ॥ 98 ॥ पशाचा रणयोर्(९) खनौ) ॥ ३८ ॥
पेशाचिक्यां रेफस्य लकारो भवति । एकारस्य नकारः ॥ अले) wa
`. Oggaraat grr’) (\‹पनयिद्धितासा ॥ ` ॥ ¢ ¶ अधिकाय wate wai” yp ee ॥
मागधिकार्यां रेफषकारयोर् लशौ(५२ अवतः ॥ (५५चदकलनिकलं दवति । श 9(१५) । ं9(*९९) । ge ॥ OD ॥ |
` # 39“ CD ah
nau ॥ २९ 1 २९ BANG Wa ९९] ॥ 171 ॥ इति (“«्रोच॑डक्षतप्रारतखक्तणे (\०व्यंजनविंधानं Cate (ररोसमाप्तं ॥ २॥ ॥ (रदति ara सपण९५) ॥
[1
* एत. वर्च॑ । ग्रामः are: afar याति॥ A and C om. the interpunctuation between व° and ग्रा ° ,B hasit ; A BC have the intérpunctuation between are and,
` ` . भ्रसि०; 7 om. it throughout. + Ed. अरे र दुषटरा्तसाः प्रणमत प्रणथिश्थितास्याः॥
"~^ ~-------------------------~-~----~--“--- ----~-----------~--~-----~--.-~-------- ^-^ 4-५-१५
(९) Bom. (२) Bars, 7 वरन्त ॥ (र) 4. गख, ए ग्रा, ¢ 7) प्रचो ॥ (४) 4 ०४.
1, ; this example, B ary, D argt; C D prefix the Skr. ary: ॥ (४५) ¢ 7) घ्रसि॥
{Bom (७) 8 लोन ॥ (=) चरे ॥ (€) ^ -दुंल॑क्लस्सा, B ear । war, ¢
: : `~ ""इुटलक्वसा, 1) -दुडलक्वसा ॥ (१०) 8० ¢ ; Ayana, ए पमनमतः, 7 पन नक्ते ॥ (१९) .- ". ` @ इछा om. पन, B प नदृष्िष्यासा, 0 vac fesrat, D पनर free; B explains < Yh in the margin as Skr. पणएडिकायाः (sic), but the word is nof distinctly . " “ Tepible. (९२) B wath (१६) Beart (१४) ^ वन्दकसति awafa; 2 वन्द् oy ५". करति ॥ कसलसव्तिं; Bin the margin explains कलति by the Skr. करोति ; C.D qo
“OOO! weafc (९५) ARB, BBS; OD prefix the Skr. Ha: (१९९) A BSS, D om
“~: 67 prefix the Ske. दंसः ॥ (१७) A wea, B Ga, CD om. (१८) BOD om. this “remark. (१९) A छते, Bom. छत ॥ (२०) © D read भापातरविधानं चतुथे, making .'', this the termination of the fourth chapter ; their third chapter terminates with
| ` न 86 ; see App. CD. ` (९९) 0 चतुथ, D gain (९९) A om. (२३) A BDom. ..”- 1 ` this remark. , (९४) Here follow various dates in the 088. ; A arg छव्ण ९; 8. : ^ "4. + ~ माच छष्ण ८ We संवत् १५६९ ; D संवत् wae ar; C gives no date eee ee
5
“हि ॥ सादित्नमानं(९) सादिवयतं(र). 4
२४ APPENDIX A.
EXPLANATION.
The MSS. C and D contain a large number of Stitras and Explanatory | ; a
Remarks, in addition to the text given in the preceding pages. Toa very. slight extent this is also the case with the MSS. A and B. Some of this addi- tional matter is found only in one MS., some other in more than one. This is indicated by the heading letters of the Appendices ; thus Appendix OD gives what is common to the MSS. C and D. The places in the text to which these additions belong, are indicated by the insertion of corresponding letters; thus, = | on p. 21, the letter A in the commentary to Stitra IT, 25 refers to an additional , `` remark in MS. A, given in Appendix A on p. 34; again, on p. 5, the letters C D in Stitra I, 64 refer to an additional Stitra in the MSS.C and D, given in Appendix © D, on p. 40. The words printed in red type in the Appendices refer to the words in the text, after which the additional remark is to
` be inserted,
1 Asan Arh tel ee tea ककि
1
APPENDIX A.
TO SUTRA IT, 25. ee PAGE 21.
४,
(९) MS: arf ears ॥ (ए) MS सादितं (?); in A the two. letters य and प are. | often indistinguishable. "| Bere ke ह ae eae 1
ष)
APPENDIX 8. “eu
APPENDIX B.
el
TO SUTRA ITI, 23. ON PAGE 26.
fait. faefad निन्हवियं(९).। निङ्कविका निन्हविया(९) ॥
TO SUTRA III, 84. ON PAGE 82, केषर? Barat काद“) । (र)शक्ुनः सउणो५) । “प्रतिकूलः पद्- war । काकेन are) । काकः काश्रो । भौगिकः atest
त्यागिनां aga) gag: पणो । Osage: अवं ।
त्यागेन चाएणए । त्यागः watt सुचिरं at whe सुई ।
(प्रचुरेण परेण | पिशाचेन {पिसाएण । पिगश्राचः पिसाश्रो | os कनरानिपालं. वणरादफलं(९२) । (प्वनराजौ वराई । (९५ A ` पं (गजेन गणएण। गजः tO । (५पतिना are । 1 = गोमती ` गोम । Oscar जउणा । Cage बाजल । .:. ५ वातेन वाएण । वातः atte) | मदिरः att Caray नई। पादुका पाउश्ना। मदेन AUT मदः मश्रो । कूपिका Feary कपौनां are CVagt Ast. figet रिण! कूपन gue |
` पठन्तं । ae मरा । विप्रयोगः विप्य्रोश्रो(९)॥
प (१) MS. farefasy ॥ (२) MS. निन्हवयं ॥ (२) The MS. places this example after ~ चख ॥. -(४) This example algo occurs in D (see App. 0 7). (४) MS. ware “gest -॥ : (@) MS. vege ॥ (©) MS. काकण ॥ (८) MS. त्यागिनाः ॥ (९) MS. चा- | eat ir (te) MS.. Sawa: ष्य वरुः ` (१९) Conjectural; MS. vada quay ॥ ; (९९) MS, ourfsre ॥ . (९२) This exam ple also oceurs in A, omitting however वन it. os (qa) MS gedwee, and places it after ग्या ॥ (१५) MS. गायनः गायणा ॥ (१९) oo 08. गला ॥ ` (१७) BES. prefixes the example सितं सिय, which is repugnant to the
following sttra (ii, 85). (xe) MS. जतुना stom. (१९९) MS. बातुलः ara ॥ “>” (ae) MS. वाक ॥.. (९९). This example also occurs in A. (28) MS. gat aa.
¦; कृश्रा(*९) कूवेा(९ परषं aera fait) e करूषः कूचयो(*९९) कूवे(९२) | कतिना कदा । कापुरुषं AGRA) , , ; arated) 1 रवेण TW दवः PAW । af सह(१९। अयुक्तं `, , ,
[
Be’ | APPENDIX ९.
APPENDIX 6. SUTRA 1, 11 ON PAGE 6. ५८.०१ Te जषशतार् eg! ॥ १९० ॥ la वन्तमानान् नानः परयो; जसशसाः ई इय् श्रादेशो भवति ॥ *कमलद् (९) aafa भ्रलिखलदरं करिगंडाई मदति | †श्रसुलदम् एत्थं ए जां {भलि ते एवि दूर(र गणंति ॥ ९॥ TO SUTRAIL17. ON PAGH 22
oo भवेति OD Aa मणामे वयं भणामः aa माँभण। Faq -.
८. नापि दूरं गणयंनि॥ † 0 weed | सुलभं CHP वा । कदा गदा भवति ॥ { 0 ute |. ae ; . हटात्कारणा ॥
AL भण ॥ oa षसः Aad aed! मे कय॑ अस्माभिः ad भे feet wa । 4 firme: | मे ते णिक्विट्रो sea a) free FTN मम देश 1. 4.4
भे देषो अस्माकं देः । भे fee मयि निदितं । मे fetes ~ sara निदितं ॥ ॥
* 0 कमलानि var अलिकुलानि करिगंडानि .क्ंच॑ति। अलभम् अच न येषां भति
--~~------------------~______~_~_~~~~~_~-~_~~_~~~_--~~~~~~~~-----~---------~--------------+ ~
“ (a) Seo EL 0. IV, 858. त, ए. IIT, 4, 25. = (र) The MS, has the mark of. interpunetuation (}).after each word of the first line; thus awe | We 1” (द) The MS. has fas: रगणंति ॥. . (४) MS. om 7
APPENDIX 7, 2७ `
APPENDIX 7. SUTRA II, 1. ON PAGE 18. पर 1" ॥ श्श्नतन् शेधं Geers ॥ AF प्राते पदयार् यत् संधिकराये तत् संछठतेक्नवर् भवति ॥ a । SUTRAS IL 1.1, ON PAGE. Wg area ॥ ९० ॥ ` `, srr, खरा योर) व्यजने लुते ऽवशिष्यते स उद्धुत TBI । Se waar खरे परे संधिर् न भवति ॥ गगनं vad | गधक्टौ गंघडड । | ४7० युवा nv e & ~~ ba. संधि {>~} bay
~. इवणस्य उवणेसख arg वणे परे संधिर् न भवति ॥ न aan श्रपि `: ` वकाश्ः। ण (भवेरिविमो वि श्रवयासेा ॥
oe TO SUTRA II, 14. ON PAGE 18
a afer ॥ हदौतौ च केर्षाचिन् मते भवत एव ॥ Rad Fad 1 सदय
ङ्क सौोश्ररितरं। कौरवाः कौलवा कौरवा ॥ est af सवग्यैसंयुक्रौ(९ `
भवत एव ॥ अहंकारः दद्रा) । श्रं जित afin ` . TO SUTRA TI, 27. ON PAGE 22
`: अर्थैः एवं सवस विभक्तिषु ॥
“os «7 कनो and oH (७) 2 eH ॥ (८) D संजि अजितं ॥
(९) 7 न्तेः॥ (र) 7 ०४. (द्) 2 वेर ॥ (४) 7 oman (४) Seo App, CD, "^
: on GPS नसम ।. -जखाणं or HATH. HTS or. STaTS or HU or जष्ाश्िता or © BT! जेता Sra) जस्ाणं or SHAS ॥ ss or Tafa) जसेषु or जघस ॥ णवं .
oe ५२ देवादयः ॥ ,
२८ APPENDICES BC AND C 7.
APPENDIX BC. TO SUTRA III, 5. ON PAGE 24,
+
खथ ¦ BE VS । प्राप्तं पत्तं ॥
APPENDIX 6.79,
TO SUTRA 1, 1. ON PAGE 2.
Ste. प्रातम् अनेकधा भवति । तद् यथा* ।
; ५ Pa ॐ ~ # Q adds the following declension of जघ = यज्ञ्, मत्ता = साच and शिच्चन्निर्तै; . जसो । जषा ॥ हे जसा | हे जसा ॥ जसं | जसा or HG ॥ HTT or HAT | जेहि or TAPS | `
सन्ना | AWB or AWS or सन्ना ॥ Van) दे मन्ता or रदे मन्ना or दे मन्ता. ` श्नं“ सक्ता ठ WATS or सत्ता ॥ ATT सभादि or walks or WHIPS ॥ मार । सक्ताः .. ` ० PG SARI UTTER ॥ मन्ता 1 मन्ना ०" WATS मन्नाए | TE or WAN
शिक! णिङ्वाणि 1 Fast: Feria ॥ एषं यञ्च वत्॥ ।
APPENDIX CD. i ३९
*इय्ञरिपउरे, गामे दल्पुलिंदाए Gay सदो । तद् सच्लि्नद. fret eta जद बालए 1 तुंगो ॥९॥ fended (रजायणयरपसरे जाव seats ए BE (*पडिदत्थनिंबगद्वदवंयणे॥ ता वन्न भत्तारं ॥ २ ॥ महाराष्रदेशे | भातु | भेट HAM | व॑टकसु । FT ॥ कणाटदे्रे ।
`“ क्रूल् ॥ द्राविडदेशे | चार् ॥ carte ॥ | TO SUTRA 1 3. ON PAGES 8, 4
agarta ॥ चलारिं चत्तारि । WaT: SAT ¦ चतुरः चरा ५)।
तिष्ठ॑ति) fasta पश्च(*) Deg वा) । युयं ge) । वयं अन्दे) ॥ > ggg y मामेभ्यः) avatar । peat गुदिंते(*") । धेषूिते । „रदिते । Sefer वेति) । (तौति ॥ OO os geist दोसु । 1५२) Ag ats तोः; ॥ TO SUTRA I, 5. ON PAGE 4 शशाद ute ude red med agri Ogg aga’ age ।
nae meee
2 #* 0 इक्पलिंदाण व्याघ्राणां सदो शद भाक्षरिपभखरे खजाप्रचरे गामे ग्रामे GAL FIA) ` ..
Ss द तथा चिद्व अरिः सव्निन्नद् सच्नते जद यथा तंग राचिः Gee सुखेन बोल यलिक्राः ater $ ५ तुभो इति" श्वासा gat तसा तम दति नामनिघ्रानकोाभान्धर ॥ 0 सक्वोसं S ज्ञोयण्यरपखरो सषविं्रतियोजनकरप्रसरः जाव यावत् अच्लयि यापि णन दाद् भनति | : पडि्त्यनिंबगद्धवदूवयष् & प्रति दस्तबिंबय्दपतितरट्ने. AT तावत् FT व्रज UATT WATT Il O&O सत्तवीसंजोष्रण HRT Te! तस्य कराएं प्रसरः चंद्रकरप्रसरः॥ || ¢ भतिद faved विंबं डलं य॒स्य ख परतिदसकिंबः। sfreafisr यदपतिण् चंद्रः दूति बानं ॥ OE एभ्यः । गुदभ्यः | घेनुभ्यः । नदोभ्यः। द्वाभ्यां । चिभ्वः॥ ** ¢ दादु) fe wi सुप् {89९ H, 12) 1 mare वगय (2), 5 दिप्) @ersaye (ii, 4 दाप् ) 1 Weise
Gi, TL Sua). अनुखारेा० (1, 15. दोस) ॥ Tf 0 ag | द्वि-ष््े रुप् (see ii, 12) |
Ds wee Gi, 8 विप् ; sie!) | खरा (ii, 4 Aga) | अद्ागमो० Gi, 11 वेरु) 1 व्यनखारा० hel Gly 15 Bg) a FEO sar Fawn
6) ॐ wafesat ॥ . (९). 7 wus ५. 2. (६) 7) जोद्ण० ॥ , (४) D °दच्छ°
“op fase ॥ ८५)7 चतुरे ॥ (ई६).7 fadfa, Com, (९) © छण. (८) D quand magi (€) Com. ˆ {९०)7.गदश्दितो॥ (१९) D Fn (९९) 7 तादित ॥ (द) ८ Fou (९४) Deen: (aa) D ware > 3
2, नमेत् (९०) चतथ बवष्वनस अय भ्यस् । तवगंस्य° (iii, 16 एमः wea) । रदे द्र" (६,
ye APPENDIX C D.,
werd y अ्र्दाणं sere* । (णमे अरदताणं । एमे सिद्धाण{ । (रणम श्राद्रियाणं | रणम उवज््यायाणं॥ | Tear लाए सव्वणं ॥ | TO SUTRA I, 6. ON PAGE 5 कपि y दोषं AGO) । fa । ase ॥ SUTRA I, 6. ON PAGE 5. ne yam yey | लिंगात् परष् टा ree) ण श्रादेशो भवति ॥ देवेए । गुरुणा | asa | ददिणा i fata इत्यादि ॥ TO SUTRA I, 7. ON PAGH'S. a गाजें ॥ *aefeO | एई । TRO । wee fete वेदिं । `: :: तोहि ॥ २.
(न tl,
------न-~~
` - + 0 नदीनां veut) estat मधनां | अस्माकं ॥ † 0 war अरदंतारं ware ey
स्थितं। संयोगस्य (1, 80 wat अरदत् ) | अन् खलारेा० (i, 15 गमे खरद्द॑त्) । yer | ८ ware (ii, 11 wat अरत) । षष्ठौवच्° (ii, 18)। सागमस्या° Gi, 5 war च्वरद्देतण्) i ` ae खरो० (ii, 4 णमे रंताण) | अनखारो० (ii, 15 wat wewarw) ॥ , { ¢ सिद्धाणं 1. - ` सिदेभ्यः॥ § © arafrard याचायभ्यः। अचायं) कगचज० (iii, 84 अखायै) | Were .. ४, 4) Teta चा स्थाने इ भवति (आद्य) वशविक्ले्षं कला संयोगे (ili, 80...: श्याद्रिय)। @tre ii, 4 च्ादूरिया) ! याम् अस्य एः (i, 5 यादरियाण) | अनखारो० (ii, - 15 खादूरियाणं)॥ || C उवञ्कायाणं उपाध्यायेभ्यः। Satara । भपरथसश्य (iii, {2 ` उवाध्याय) | awry (पः, 5 उवाधाय) 1 तवग्गद्य (iii, 16 खउवक्ाय)। लोपे (, 24) . . . तस्मिन्० (ॐ, 26 उवाञ्काय ) | खलं ° (1, 8 उवज्काय) | खरोा० (ii, 4 उवडभाया) 1 | ॥ श्यामाः (,5 खउवञ्जायाण्)। अनखारा० (ii, 15 उवञ्जायाणं)। उवठभायाणं fern .. q (नमा लेके सुब्बसाधभ्यः॥ ##* Caaf | नदौभिः) यद्माभिः। Sanh) दाभ्यं |. ˆ - ` चिभिः॥ tO aR fester 1 द्विवयणे ब्वयणएं ( 0) ज्ञेयं (i, 12 द्वि-भिस्).1.- “ ) mange (171, 5 द्भिस् )। खरा० (ii, 4 देभिस्)। Fe five: (i, 7 दादिं)॥ oe
QQ) Cadds war अरिंताणं । wat अरुष्धंताणं ॥ (२) 0 adds war erated ny, (द) © १० WaT GaswmTerd ॥ (४) 0 बे० ॥ (५) D reads only रो for gaye * eee . (ई) Dom, (©) 7 गदड ॥ (८) D तुद्धोदिं and अद्धोद्िं ॥ (९) ¢ adds दोदहिः ate. वेदि ater aife miei (६०) ¢ चत॒थ्कबवचनम्॥ .
APPENDIX CD. ४९.
SUTRA I, 107, ON PAGE 6. # 10" ॥ दिचिशन्दा््या srawere किः ॥ ९० ॥ «ofa fafe दुवे* दो वे । fafa) । ag शसाऽपि ॥ । TO SUTRA 1, 18. ON PAGE 7. Sern (रचकारय्रदणात् किं। श्रकारात् परस्य ve दिलसकार एव भवति नतणो॥ . TO SUTRA 7, 19. ON PAGE 9. C Dread the 8६८४: तं तु) dq तुदं तुमं सो स्विभक्तैः | TO SUTRA 1, 20. ON PAGH 9, ¢ Dread the Sitra: च्रमि तुए तुमं तं च ॥ व्क TO SUTRA I, 24 ON PAGE 10 .. ` निवता y (तुन्दते we धिद्रा() । ane वयं ष्टाः ॥ a SUTRAS 1, 25%, 25%. ON PAGE 11 oo ॥ 28१ न्दम् aA TO ame aft परे grea श्रादेशो भवति । aft: ॥ ge frat ते ८ गणा | TAHA एव ते WUT: ॥ ; ॥ "१ तह ST ॥ २५, ॥ सविभक्रैः ॥ †तद(८)। तुन्दि ॥ gee ॥
28 न Se Serena peste कदन श तै eae
“.. * 0 दुवे) Bt वणेविख्ेषं रला दुवो ईति स्थिता । संयाग्े्ट ° (iii, 30) इन्यनेन छ
_ शरव्यं गतः (दुवो) । खरो (i, 4) इन्यनेन गा aE वे भवति (दुवे) ॥ TC चिच । , , शवार्थं ` शर्-चिय-चेयाः (, 17) ॥ TC तद् afa feweds aang (iii, 5 तयि) | ,..` , कगर्चुज° (,.84 तद्) 1 तद् सिद ॥ 5$ Came) saree (iii, 17 तुद्) 1 रणषाणं ~; सः Gi, 18 व॒सु) | बग्ग (iii, 8 तुसद्) | शद यो र्० (iii, 23 greg) । अद्ागनो° (ii, 11) RL अनेन LATTA लोपः (वन्द) | Ufa ङेः (i, 14 तम्दन्दि) ॥
ioe. (९ DB places fafe-after एवं साऽपि 1 (२) C repeats -दुखि, etc., instead of 2 । the remark एवं शएसेाऽपिः॥ (र). D reads अकारात्, om. किं $ © om. the whole of '.-. this remark in the text, but adds it in the’marginal gloss; D gives it as part
॥ ne om, (¢) Here follows stitra ti, 26 (see p. 21) in CD
of the text. (2) Cau (Dawn (Demi (छ) Chea (नो0 we
. “ प A
४९ | APPENDIX ¢ ए, SUTRAS I, १०१26, ON PAGE Tks ॥ 8" ॥ ee इं रदं at सविभक्ैः \ ९६५ ॥ | waz. सौ परे est) इं श्रहं एते) श्रादेभा भवंति | eae) ¶ ` ev सो wer | तेण दं विद्धा । ae कथयपणामे* | ॥ 26 ॥ ore जसि ॥ २६. ॥ seat जसि परे we मवति । सविभक्तैः ॥ ae awa खरा । वयं . | : ॥ |
area. TERT ॥
॥ 26° ॥ भम् aia ॥ ९६२ ॥ waz: अमि परे मम् श्रादेशो भवति । सविभक्रेः(<) ॥ मं पच्छ ॥ मां
a WR | ध os ॥ 6 a we afa ॥ Re ॥ त 5 seg fas) परे re भवति । सविभनोः(५९) ॥ अन्दे Beg) श्रन्. “ :
SUTRA I, 81. ON PAGE 12.
# 31 ॥ CDae छौ ॥ २९० ॥
` Rafa ॥ tag? | arefeg(**) ॥ (\*श्न्देसु(*५) ॥
,.. #0 कयपणामो कृतप्रणामः ॥ + 0 मद् । मथि । कगचज2 (iii, 84) द्रति ax सिद्धं ॥ .. .
os , (९) Oplaces सो after सवि० ॥ (२) 72 चंड ॥ (a) Com. (४) CD place संवि: before Bt (४) 7 अखं ॥ (६) 0 नरा ॥ (७) Carga (८) 0 राः॥ (९) ¢; - 0 19९० afte. before मि ॥ (ye) 7 गणि ॥ (x) CD place सृवि० before भसि}. (९९) Com. stitra, (१द्) 0 सदर ॥ (१४) Dom, (५५) Here follows रष्क ii, 27 (see p. 22) 7 OD ` ` `:
ao ok
APPENDIX C D. ४२. ,
TO 814 1, 5. ON PAGE 15 रिं safe दृद) । gan वसह *wakr® feed ॥ ददस्यति- : Sg ` शब्दशयाष्टादग्र पाणि भवंति ॥ trek सुश्रसदै भयस) । | विस्मर geet वदद । fant gaunt wank!) । विदप्फई(९) वुदप्फईै aera । भिश्रप्पईै% yak weak । ` विष्य gemk वदप्य(८)॥ aga वर्ण; { सरिवखो । सदृक् ET ufteat | सदृशः सरिसो | wee: सरिच्छा | एतादृशः wa - रिसा । भवादृशः भवारिसा। यादृशः जारिसा । तादृशः तारिसे। ` “कौकुशः BRAT Feu) एलिस (९) | अन्याद् शः श्रषारिसे | ., ` Sgr अ्न्दारिसा । caren तुम्दार्सि। र्यादि 1 os TO SUTRA II,9. ON PAGE 16 WCET सौधं aay । मौनं aga । पौरुषं परिस ॥ । TO SUTRA 11, 11. ON PAGE 17 afte पडियार । यत् जं । तत् तं ॥ ~ *
SoS ® 0 षमः । खरा० (i, 5) दत्यनेन ह इयसु (Gen) | कगचल० (६, 84) इत्यनेन eee लोपः! उ स्थितं (उषः) । रशषा० (iii, 18 Tew) । द° (iii, 18 wee) ! .
~ free) । पवयोार्० (iii, 22 fawe) 1 प्रथम° (iii, 11 फिर) । पनः प्रथम” (ii, 11 ५. .“भिष्०) | कार्य face ` विद्वेषे छते दश्च दूति स्थितं (freee) । warm Gi, 11) ` 6... इत्यनेन Vara: (Frac) | एवलेभ्यो° (iii, 2 भिश्यसतिः) । लोपे (71, 24 Frege) ।
Aree इति सिदं॥ ‡ 0 aarti) खरा० (ii, 5 सदिक्०) । तव्ैसख० (iii, 16.
<i सडक). weer (iii, 21 सलिक्०) । रलयार्० (iii, 229 सरिक्०)। अद्ागक्षा° (ii UL eee) | Tare (आ, 9 afearm) | Brg (ili, 2 सरिवष्ठः) । रदोद्र° Gi, 10 |
-मंशखिदिषथेा) 1 खयण० (ii, 1 सरिवसा) ॥ § ¢ प्रतिपत् । खदागमः ॥ ।
मेमन ~ ----------------------------~-
<. Q) 0 ऋदि, 7 छलौ ॥ (९) 0 ददौ, 7 xgt ॥ (द) D om. (४), C places this after “ @ewtt | (४) C places this after gems (६) D places this after qyune ॥
after gern (@)-D 1०00408 वदद ॥ (२०) Deswi (१९) So bath C D .
` ण्दोद्र° Gi, 10 weet)! खराणां (ii, 1 उषडा)॥ † © द्दस्यतिः! खरा० ८, €. |
a कगचज० (177, 84 सि्रस्स॒दः)। खरो० (ii, 4 fare) | श्दोा (0, 10 ` fwers) । ` क
“ ७). D bas again win the, following forms, instead of Wu (ठ) C places this "=` in
eee ॥ खया | Brea ॥
. gy APPENDIX CD
REY सम्यक्(९) wi® 1 Fqa® दसं ॥
fate a सिराणभ
70 SUTRA II, 12. ON PAGE 17 Commentary: warat खादौनां त्यादौनां च दवचनं बह ° 1
SUTRAS II, 184,13». ON PAGE 17. ॥ 18" ॥ wearer दितौया श्रातं ॥ ९३० ॥ चतुविं शतिर aft जिनवराः । asate वि जिएवरा तित्ययरा“) से पसोश्॑तु ॥ |
` ॥ 13" सप्तम्या ठता ene ost ॥
aU कालेणं तेणं समएणं | तसन् काले तस्मिन् समये) 7 SUTRA II, 14. ON PAGE 18. ॥ 14 क्च ठ Bee ४ ९8 ४ शता वणाः ङकारनकारजकाराश् च प्राते न भवंति ॥ स्लोकः 1 fe ओ खरौ ततः, पश्चात् ख छ द ण्ड चतुःखराः | रः-डजनश्षाः(९) संति maa मैव कर्दिवचित् ॥ ९॥ (7) ॥
* "~~~
a
क् क
* 0 face! (शिरसा) ॥ †{ © नयने। शभे tC RM खरो०। गथा(९)। तेत्तीस विंजणणद्ं सत्तभेखा सरा तद्धा भणिया। चत्तारि य जोगवद्दा FSGS) HMIGT ST ॥ ९॥ CUS | SWISH । भाटढघघम । जडदगब । कटथयखफ (८) | चटतकप | शषस ॥ ९२ ॥. BT | ददद; उकः] Ww: | SE | एएएः TTT? | अव्ययोः | चाखचः ॥ २७ ॥ श्रकःप्पःंचखः(&) ॥ ४ ॥ ९४८१०) मललवसा भवंति PHA) | saa ४९ wefan Bafa संबेाधने(१२)॥ ऽ 0 ख्यः इति विसजनोयः। (Qa) eat उच्ारणाथः । कुमारोस्तनयगला- aay qa विसव्जंनौ यसंज्ञा भवति | Wass वालवत्बस्य बालिकाकुचयग्प्र वद्ने चवत् BUY (१४) विसम्ाऽयम् दति समतः॥
(१९) 0०0. (२) 8 रक्॥ (२) ८ ०. 7 इषत् ॥. (४) 7 तिच्छधरा ॥ (५) See - Bhagavati (ed. Weber) p. 260, Kalpasitra (ed. Jacobi) p. 38. (ई) C saison (0) 0 oust ॥ (2८) खफद्टथ ॥ (€) MS. indistinct, न्प for wy (२०) Chee t (९९) © reverses प्रारेते YHA ६९२) See घ, C. ui, 208, 199. (१३) © अका, ` om. र ॥ (९४) © Pawar) यिति? ॥ -
क
APPENDIX C D. gu.
TO SUTRA II, 15. ON PAGE 18. vet: ॥ afae श्रद्धानस्ारोऽपि भवति ॥ कषत ॥ सक्वारा* । वोसा । तौसा । लोप ॥ भंग u देवेहिं । vata ॥ Safer लेप ॥ देवेहिं । (श्रद्वानृखार(“ ) ॥ SUTRA 11, 19. ON PAGE 19.
aT St gy aw तुश्रास at वि fing fing पूवं ॥ १ ॥
.. ॥ 1४ ॥
भौन्रुख ॥ काउश्राण । वंदेवि ॥ कथि ॥ वंदेप्पिणु(र) । पणवेप्यिएु ॥ | 70 SUTRA II, 20. ON PAGE 20
weet ॥ साकरः (वतर् मतार् Ope se आल श्रालू दरा मणः वन्ते मा मत्त saa) च यथा च्य दश.) रताः ॥९॥ gitar सेादहिक्लौ । arate frareat | अद्धावान् सद्भधालेा | Peary a Tere | गब्वैवान् गव्विरा । धनवान् धणमणो धणवन्तो | इनुमान् दणमा ` , दणमन्तो । पुष्टवान् पुषमन्ता । मानवान् aeRO । काव्यान् aa ॥ तच भवेऽपि cee ॥ गरामे भवः गामिल्लो । पुरे भवः , ` पुरिल्लो ॥ रधो भवः । अधा दद्र) । अधः खाने Beem भवति es SMO ॥ उपरि भवः उवरिज्ञो । अत्मनि भवः अपुल्लो ॥ 7 | SUTRA II, 21. ON PAGE 20. 1 24 ॥ aratrsrenanyd तावद्यावतेाः ॥ ९९ ॥
का ०४००१००
, # © dare ॥
(९) CDom, (९२) 7 ब॑०॥ (द) Com. (४) ¢ 16908 वतोः स्थाने Zao, and makes it to be a new sttra. (4) D reads yw for @te (६) C D दूत्तण्॥ (©) D inserts numbers after each suffix, thus Ht GAR, etc; C superscribes
2 5 ey ~ = them, thus zu उक्ष, otc. (=) D oxati (९) C Bai, Sate, Vee i
, ४६ APPENDIX ५२.
तावन् छब्दस्य यावच ब्दस्य तु तातावौ जाजावौ भवतः ॥ गाथा | eter
fae - प्र0 SUTRA II, 24 ON PAGE 21 ae भवति ॥ साथा । ^गरुल्श्रपयत्थाणं तरएसुक्तं vag सव्वेसिं | क दिश्रतिसिश्राण भोज्जं जलपाणं तं wae खुं ॥९॥ TO SUTRA II, 26. ON PAGE 21. ` भवति ॥ मे सुण । लं yee ॥ , निधन्यत ॥ मे भणामि । लां भणामि ॥
मे चदं खरा युष्मद् अं we) । भे देता तवदेशः । VTA युस्माकं देशः । भे feted ल्यि निदितं । भे शिदिदं gag निदितं ॥ । TO SUTRA II, 27. ON PAGE 22. भवति ta worfa । च्रं भणामि ॥ SUTRAS II, 27"--271, ON PAGE 22. nT ॥ इजेराः पादपूरण?) ॥ २७० ॥ ॥ 27" ॥ नि weed wat peek + ` ॥ ‰१० ॥ सवरि aie) !॥ vor ॥ ॥ 27" ॥ एव् केवलायै) ॥ Ror ॥ ॥ 27० ॥ यदे; BVO ॥ २७२ ॥
न जनन
* (0 गर्लघपद्ाथ नां aqua भवति स्वेषां | चधितदषितामां dred जलपानं (तदु) मद्य (खल्) i
> न 0४०
(९) 7 किनि ॥ (९) € 7) खरः॥ (8) Soc प्र. 0, TL, 217. (४) Seo प्र, ५. I, 188 (५) See H.C. HL, 167. (ई). See HC. LV, 422, 19
oo SON मे क्यं यप्माभिः छतं। मे अहं fates वं अदं fra
a 91 ॥ चु 9
APPENDIX © 7. 1
grat ॥ ko" }
॥ छः ॥ eae’) Tara ॥ ९७ ॥
_ , *दडबड(९ हद् विदा ॥
` ` ॥ शर" ॥ अतिरभवाद् उद्खसु खलेतखतेः गमने इवडद् ॥ २७० ॥
` वडव चरियाए ॥ `
॥ श" ॥ सं खड एं Cae छण जण we FATA र) ॥ २७८ ॥ faq faa faa व विश्न sare वा भवंति ॥
॥ 27५ ॥ are एषि was wate ददानौमः ॥ २७२ ॥
` ॥ 9" ॥ चया तथा अनयोः स्याने जिमतिलौ ॥ १७२ ॥
दोद्ा<) । tare खदेविण Strat (°)जिम जिम मेङ?) गलेद् । faa तिम gam) लद्द St) णियमे.१९) qa सुरद iy SUTRA LI, 29% 1 29° ॥ ओ इः ॥ २८॥
* (1 प्ररं (भवति) विभातं ॥ (द्दा)। दाला मद्{१४) THs) THAT |T कुर AV are | fwee(qu) गसिद्दो cast द् डबड(१) हद् विष्ठाए ॥ ९॥ मानं ord नायकं ofa काचिन् नायिका प्रःह(\६) । टोला Sava मया लंवारितः दौरा CAG मानं दै मा कुर निद्रया राचिर् गमिष्यति। दडवड(१) We विभातं प्रभार्तं दें (९७) (मवति) ॥ † © कालं (लब्ध्वा जायायाः) यथा यथा मेदः गलति । तथा तथा ` दभैनं लभते (यावत् नियमेन) आत्मानं (मन्यते) ॥
` (९) © दडवड ॥ (२) 7 णशावयद ॥ (द) See H. C. IV, 444. (४) C om. the com- mentary. (४) Dee (ई) Com, 1 गाथा॥ (७) D fafa fafan (=) D are ॥ (¢) D fafa तिस ॥ (१०) D Sawn -(१९) 0 नोय, D sts ; both con. mety, (५२) D fuga (Qa) D wie. m. (६४) Cat तुज ५. . (tu) © णिदए ; here x is short, metri causa, == Fwee; see Vr. 5, 22. (५६) ¢ नयका प्रादा ॥ (९७) C दा॥
gu APPENDIX C D.
खरात् परस्य श्रसंयुकरख श्रनादेर् नस्य प्रायो डो भवति ॥ dew =,
PVG संघडणं BUT | TO SUTRA III, 3. ON PAGE 28
ety WS फुडं । WO GeO । Gees SRY । नष्टः Te | दुष्टः set") । ge: B® ॥
TO SUTRA III, 6. ON PAGE 24, | nate तिक्लं । आत्मा श्रादा श्राया प्रत्ता“ spat) सर्वजन ware’) ॥ वेति किं । वद्धि Shay
TO SUTRA ITI, 9. ON PAGE 25.
gap ॥ भ्रमरः भवरा watt wea ॥
weet ॥ प्रथमगन्दस्य चलारि पाणि 1 पदु पदुम पढमे पुढे ॥
स्तौ at
SUTRA III, 11.
#॥ ike y eatrerdeh प्रथमद्वितीयौ ॥ ९९८ ॥ वग्गेणणं ठतौयचत्थंयोः स्याने यथासंख्यं प्रयमददितौयौ भवतः ॥ नगरं रकरः । मार्गणः मक्कणो । भिरितरः किरितरं । मेघः Feat । ara: वक्लो । धश्मैः GT । राजा राचा । TT चवर । जौमूतः AT) | निद्रः णिच्छरो । BHU SBT । तडागं asta । मंडलं म॑टलं | उमर्कः ZARA | गाढं ATS । Ge: dat । carl”) sar मदनः aaa’) । कंदर्पः कतप्पो । दामेादरः तमेतरेा । मधरं aati
बंधवः पंथवेा ॥
(९) 7 स्प्ट॥ (र) Cee, ]) न्ड्ं॥ (8) Ces, D oar (8) C ग्या, D डा ॥
(४५) 7 अत ॥ (६) CD awaqqi (७) SoCD, पणा द् ॥ (८) Sod D, with इ; but in C corrected to ZN (€) D संडा(?) ॥ (१०) D war?yy (१९) Soc D;
but Chas a marginal correction in pencil a# aT Il
APPENDIX CD. ४८
TO SUTRA III, 12. ON PAGE 26. afgoy, जिनप्रतिमा जिणएपडिमा । वितस्तिः विदत्यौ (९) । वसतिः वसह । भरतः भरदा । कातरः काद | मातुलिंगः२ माडलिंगो । पापं पावं। पचः क्िदनि। gat fast) | SUTRA III, 15%. ON PAGE 27.
॥ 15 ॥ arate Ar ar १५७ ॥ पकारवकारयोः स्थाने मकारो वा भवति ॥ शवरः सवरा समरोा। an सिव्णि सिमिणे । ARO Ta णौमौ। wa gar पुरिमे ॥ TO SUTRA 771, 16. ON PAGE 27. agi ॥ TATA वद्धमाणे । Bgi Tet ॥ gad ॥ खिद्यते fas) रुदितं ee ॥ SUTRA 117, 17% ON PAGE 27,
॥ 1. WHAT ॥ Vor | । जकारस्य खाने रकारो भवति ॥ arene Grech सयुत्छजति ararz ॥ यष्टिः aA | यष्टिका लटिञ्रा« ॥
TO SUTRA 111, 19. ON PAGE 28. ara yo राजा WUT) च्राज्ञा ATUT |
TO SUTRA IIT, 20. ON PAGE 28. age) (Cate कपेरा । atts gan ` ayy fiat) वदिन azat ॥
(९) D वितसौ॥ (९) D fawaat it (द) D ofeiiirn (४) D विद्ध ॥ (४) D om. (ई) 7 पून्बेः॥ (७) 7 पुच्छ ॥ (८) Cua, D wel (९) ¢ "दिखा, D °द्िका॥ (a2) C om. this example.
7
+ APPENDIX CD.
TO SUTRA IIL, 21. ON PAGE 28, ` ज्य asqg@® वलसुद्दं । mes) meaty तडागः तलाश्रो २ } क्रौडति कोलई(५) । स्फरिकः फलहे ।
SUTRAS ITI, 22, 22. ON PAGH 28.
॥ ॐ ॥ चवयोरेः Segre: ॥ ८२ ॥ पवयोार् व्यत्सछासा भवति ॥ पापं पाव॥
u 22° yy रल्योर्
RATA: २९५ ॥ पय्थेकः | ete. + TO SUTRA IIL, 23. ON PAGE 29,
जना ॥ कमात् कम्दा । तस्मात् तन्दा५)। afer afre) ॥
TO SUTRA ITI, 30. ON PAGE 31.
af ॥ ओ fas BO fed श्रेत् श्ररहता। श्राचायैः श्राय FRO । स्तौ TO ॥ ` |
wee ॥ तनवौ तणएवौ weal लख्पी । gal meat. पौ पृदषौ । Coat Casati wat मदुवौ । खात् सिया५५। rata: सिश्रावाश्रो(*२ | भव्यः भवि्मो(*२) | Op छृतं सुवे कयं ¦ खे जनाः Ba HUT | ज्या जोरा
TO SUTRA ITI, 81. ON PAGE 31.
ave ॥ चयस्तिंश्त्(** तेतीसा । चयोाविंशतिः(५) Barer ॥
(९) Dae (२) गु०॥ (a) Dae (2) D ates (५) 1) तद्य ॥ (६) 7 afan (9) Deru (=) D °रिखि॥ (९) D eat (९०) 72 व०॥ (१९) C Fearn (१९) 7 न्वाड॥ (48) 7 भवि i (१४) 7 खः॥ (१५) Com.
४
4 es
oy ee a ee eae
APPENDIX © D. Yr
SUTRA III, 34. ON PAGE 32, \॥ ५4 ॥ कमवजत्दफवं प्रायो wa ॥ 8४ ॥ स्वरात् परेषां ्रनादिश्ुतानां चरशयुक्रानां कगचजतद्पयवां प्रायो लुग् भवति ॥ क (२ । काकः काश्मो(र) ॥ ग । नागः art च । पिशाचः पिसाओ्रा५)॥ ज। गजः wat त। fad fain zi मदः wary प। नूपुरं णर ॥ य । निश्चयः शिच्छश्रा(<॥ ar देवः SHO gaze इति fan काला । गंधो । चारो । परद्र ॥ क्विद् आदेर् aie ॥ युन; उणा | गंधं se च च्र। षभः उसा ॥ श्रसंयुक्तसयेति किं ॥ sa अक्तो । aa) wal कचित् संयुक्तस्यापि ॥ नक्तंचरः WERT । | नमस्कारः एमायारा णवयारे*९ ॥ प्रायो ग्रदणात् कचिन् न भवति ॥ शपथः(५२) सवदा । शापः(\२ सावे । aaa) । प्रयागजलं(** पयाग- जलं । प्रयुक्तं cai) | विप्रयोगः विप्पजाश्रो ॥ SUTRA IIL, 35. ON PAGE 82. ॥ $, ॥ थन अवसः Be ॥ कगचजतदपयवां प्रायो लुकि सति ओषाऽव्णाऽवलेपरेा यवं च्रापद्यते ॥ TO SUTRA III, 86. ON PAGE 82 west ॥ दति ओच॑डशृतप्राकृतलक्तसे(५९) व्य॑जनविधानं ठतोयं ward ॥ TO SUTRA ITT, 39. ON PAGE 83. wee ॥ पुरुषः पुलिशे । Cg ए । ORR) ae ॥
~~~
(९) See घ. C. 1, 177. (र) D adds numbers, thus क १,ग र, ete. (a) D का, and adds the following examples के किल्ला कोदल्ला। काकौ are । प्रतिङ्कुल्लः afe- ऊला॥ (3)Davi (५) 7 पिसाउ॥ (ई) D fureairi (@) Dean (८) न्ड, D न्द्ध; D adds the Skr. परपुष्टः॥ (€) D Seri (१०) C om. (१९) D adds नघकारः॥ (१९) CD स०॥ (९६) ¢ arg: (modern Hindi खाप्). (२४) © agra ॥ (९५) C TST ॥ (९६) Dreads ग्प्राह्तप्रकाष्े ॥ (६७) ( om. this example, (९८) D मिष॥ -
YR APPENDIX CD.
गाया. | be (रलदशवशनमिलग्लगशिलविश्रलिदमंदाललाजिदं दिजुे(२) | वौलजिणे पक्लालदु मम (*)श्यलम् श्रवन्नजंवालं* ॥ ९ ॥ SUTRA ITT, 39*. on PAGE 33. ॥ 89" ॥ Oat teat तकारख दकार वा भवति ॥ (९)दाव ताव । कदं
कयं । Oat गयं । सुदं aii इत्यादि ॥
॥ सकः) ॥ ` | dad wad Jaundice पिशादिकौ । ५ माग (“गौरसेनी च षडभाषाश च प्रकीर्तिताः ॥९॥
# Rd. रभस-वण्ए-नस-छुर-शिर-विगलि त-मंदारराजितांद्धि-युगः। वौरजिनः प्रक्षालयतु मम सकलम् वन्ध-जंबालं ॥ ९॥
(९) Com. (९) D दल, © originally warw, but corrected into wew; also 0 7 नमिष्य, but in H. ¢. IV, 288 afww; also D faafazn (द) D atu (४) CD waea (४) ¢ D give no siitra for this commentary ; but add it as if it were part of stitra 89. (६) D prefixes तापः (sic); see H. 0. IV, 262. (9)
CDread पदं wil (=) Com. (९) CD Ben
APPENDIX BCD. 43
APPENDIX BOD.
70 SUTRA I, 8. ON PAGE 8. भ्रम् ॥ गगा | are रक्डउ(९) । रक्छड(र₹) at वः | (द)श्नम्दे vag?) | wre) नो) नः ॥ डसि 1 “तसा तिससा९) ॥ Se ॥ \, (पुत्तो ते । पुत्तो मे । तव सुदं aa ge ॥ डि MRO कुले) । aa) qed । afC” afer त्यि afar afae’®?) 70 SUTRA II, 4. ON PAGE 1b. gare ॥ (विंशतिः Fat । Raa ater । वच्छे५५) भवुच्छं(१९) । Cate बेभरि५) y नेपुरं ॥ (\५“खंगह्ाति dfimexC 1 कला mE) | 1 नयन विहन (९०) Ge) निव्वायेते५९९ नी वारिश्रद(र२) ॥
#* 2 ब्रुवे ॥ + 0 नयनविहौनं मुखं ॥
(१) 0 7 त॒न्भे॥ (२) Beart (द) Dwr (४) 0 ?णे॥ (५) Baers (९) Bare! 7 9००७ यस्याः san fae । कस्याः कस्स fae; and ¢ D add गिरिणा (see I, 12). (ऽ) 0 7) तें पुत्तो | सं पुत्ता ॥ (र) OD add Skr, तव ga । मस सुखं ॥ (€) OD add गामि and कुलम्मि॥ (१०) 000. (१९) 7 तच्छ ॥ (aR) BOD तस्िन्; the whole reading in B is confused wa! afea) aa! तमि (or area 2) 1 तम्दि। afte (or af?) ॥ (९२) Bafa समयि az az, D wfe ax मधि az, C only azati (१४) Bom. this example (see iii, 82. ii, 15). (१५) B om. Sky. transla- tion, but see the marginal gloss. = (९९६) D qe ॥ (१७) D repeats afer | (श) B dfaex ॥ (९९) B arg, D कड (see ii, 19). (९०) B नद्नं ISAT I (२९) So B; ५ D निवायेते॥ (२२) B निष्वा०, CD Wyate |
rr
१५ APPENDIX BCD. TO SUTRA III, 8. ON PAGE 24. भक्लरो ॥ कः करोति का करद । कः पचति का पयद(५॥ TO SUTRA 177, 6. ON PAGE 24. | लच्छी ॥ 0 7) ॥ श्रात्मा श्रप्पा) ata fan) ॥ TO SUTRA ITI, 28. ON PAGE 29. जन्दा ॥ arm कष्ट ५) 1 ata fare) । ara) उन्दा(९)॥ TO SUTRA ITI, 24. ON PAGE 29. दुग्गा ॥ शकः RT) । तस्करः तक्करो ॥ TO SUTRA III, 27. ON PAGE 30. | श्न्येषाम् उक्तविशेषणं f° सएव भ०।च्र० Bol खगं Ati qo Tol दुजनः दुज्नणो । ara) wer) । भुक्तं मुत्तं । धान्यं धन्न(*९)। सपैः amt wa) ga) काव्यं कव्वं । श्यं wail’) ॥ | 0 SUTRA IIT, 85, ON PAGE 82 नाया )}. पिशाचाः पिसाया । (\“वनराजा वणएराया । माता ara’ | यदा sat) । (\“पापफलं पायदलं ॥ वषं दति किं ॥ देवाः Zar) 1 पिता पिश्रा< । (“लोकस्य लेश्रस्सु । भुवनं सुश्रणं । करचिट् भवत्य् एव ॥ पिवति(९९ पियद् ॥
(९) ए पचर ०" पचद् ?॥ (२) 2 तौष्डं॥ (a) ^ 2150 has this example, see
note १९, 7. 29 ; ACD place it before ष्णा (see p. 29), but B after जम्हा ॥ .
(४) A कन्दा (see note १२, p. 29). (४) CD wari (ई) CD place this example before यस्मात् (seep. 29). (७) 8 7 उष्मा ॥ (=) Dwar @ CD नाख॥ (१०) CD wen (१९) 8०8; CD wg it (९९) Conjectural; B has war:
ga; CD we BH (१३) 8 watt (१४).8 om. this example. (१४) B adds |
शरदा सार्या) (१६) 23 8१78 अपतं waa (MS. च्यपक्तं) अप दितं च्यव्रहियं (MS @ated) ; then follows पिता, then माता, then wreath (९७) Bari (9) B places this among the regular examples, sce footnote ९६. (९८) D परिया ॥ (९०) Bom, the remainder, (२५) C om 7
5} FE 'y 1; ३ INDEX OF su'TRAS. yt
I. INDEX OF SU’TRAS.
nao aad
Manuscripts, | CHAPTER I. A/|BICID 11 fag wad चधा ॥ 1| 1| 1 1 2 लिंगं च ॥ 2| 2| 2] 2 8 तस्मात् SEAT विभक्तयः ॥ | 8| 8/ 8 4 कचिद् व्यत्ययः ॥ 4| 4) 4| 4 5 सागमस चषयश्रामाणोह्यावा॥ | 5) 5!) 5] 5 6 | संख्याया WE? ॥ 6 | 6 | 6 | 6
076*|यणः॥ roel (aoa (i ane
7 हि fam | 7| 8| 8
8 feat भ्यसः ॥ 8| 8] 9] 9
9 दतौयादौनां एवं una feat i | 9) 9/10/10
10 BCT AIT AMAT ॥ 10 | 10 | 11 | 11
CD 10°) दिचिब्दाभ्यां amare fa: ॥ = (= TD TY
11 पुंसि gaa ॥ 11 | 11 | 18 | 18
। 0 11. | ज्ञीवे aware दरं ॥ 1/4 fie णो Stn च ॥ 18 | 12/16 | 14 ५.1 सण् च Te: I 18 | 18 |16 | 15 14| wha SH 14 | 14 | 17 | 16
15 ए WaT ऽतः॥ | 15 18 |1# |
16 are fara तच्छ श्रातः॥ |16 16 | 19 | 18
17 तद् द्रदभेः से ष्टौरूपाणणं 1 17 | 1; | 20 | 19
INDEX OF SU’TRAS.
CHAPTER I. Guz ॥ [ad तवं geCD] aa सौ सवि भक्तेः Il afaau [ठमं तं 07] च।॥ तुम्भे जसि ॥ तक्रे wen ते ga ax तए रायां ॥ तुमादिं तमादहिंता garat तदत्तौ पंचम्यां ॥ तुदतुजद्यतम्द षष्ठया ॥ aaa चरामि ॥ | तद् ST | श्रखादः ॥ eu द अदं सौ aft: ॥ ae जसि ॥ मम् अमि ॥ ae शसि ॥ मे मए रायां ॥ Heat Sat ॥ श्रम्दाहितेा भ्यसि॥ मदमञ्दय ङसि ॥ न्दम् चरामि ॥ CD31" az ङ
4. | ठ | ८
`
INDEX OF SU’TRAS.
Text| Appendix CHAPTER II. ^ । {3 | 0 D
D 1" | संज्तवत् संधिकाये wea _ |--|--|--|.1
1| . | खराणां खरे प्ररतिलेपस्धयः॥ | 1| 1| 1| 9
DD | खरस्य उद्धृते ॥ -- | -- | -- | $
7 1“ | न gave अखे ॥ estes ed
2 Barge ATT |i 2/2] 21 5
8 eae संयोगे ॥ 8 | 8| 8| 6
4 खरेऽन्याऽन्यख ॥ 4| 4| 4| 7
5 खरा रि च wate 5| 6 | 51 8 |
4 > no 6| 6| 6| 9|
| 7 „ | चद् च॥ | ¢| ¢| 10|
8 च्रोरौतः॥ 8 | 8 | 8 | 11
9 रख च ॥ 9 | 9| 9/12
10 एद् ओद् र लोपा विसच्छनौयस्य ॥ | 10 |10 | 10 | 18 a 11; | रदागमेाऽनुखर लोपौ च व्यजनख ॥ | 11 |11 | 11 | 14 ^. 12 दिलं बहतेन ॥ 12 | 12 /12 | 15 Eee 118 षष्ठौ वच् चतुथ ॥ ` , 11318. 16 | ह 07 184 प्रथमाया दितौया श्रषं॥ = |--|--|14 | 17 , | (67.184 सह्याम् eater श्रि ॥ ` | | - |15 | 18 | ba 14 07 |न yrete+OD Eth 114 | 14 | 16 | 19 a \,.. [15 | BATA बहलं ॥ ` | 15 | 15 | 17 | 20 „ ` 16] | गोर् गावि ॥ 16/16/18 |21 Vee एवार्थ एद-चेयाचियाः ॥ ` 17 | 17 | 19 | 22
18 च्रयन्रस्योरश्रलोपः॥ . |18 | 18 | 20 | 23
पट INDEX OF 8U’TRAS.
गलया ppendix CHAPTER II. #. | 8 | ^| 7 ATE ga aw [ear 01)
श्रो [fa-C D) [far-A B] [पिए
वेप्िए 0 7] पूवैकालाथं ॥ 19 | 19 24 मल् चरथ wae ॥ 20 [20 | 22] 25 तचभवेऽपि इल्ल उलि ॥ अधो Sz ॥ ता ताव[जाजावास् CD] ताव्
[यावतः OD] | 21 21 | 23| 26 | उपमाने पिव दव विव विय व्व व जदा | 22 |22 | 24) 27 वतः॥
Sta श्व ्रपयेः) 2४ [४8 | 25) 28 | खलोः & | [२५२५ | 26) 89 ` Parada 25 2 | श| 80, la arg युश्रदः॥ ` ` ति ` 26 fee [1.597.81| श्रसदोऽपि [मे स्वासु CD] ॥ 27 | 27 [1,441.43 ^ : THT, पाद् पुरणे ॥ |. | -- | 28| 81 | 0 जि ्रव्ययं एवाथे ॥ ` , . 1 |~ 291 42. M Z waft श्रानंतय्यारथें ॥ | ।_ |__| 80| 88 | एवर् केवलार्थे ॥ _|- | 31) 34 यदे; Fy _ || ga] gal ,-‹ 2 uy fale qarat ॥ _ |_| 33) sel .. दडबड TATE ॥ -|--| 34 | ` :
अतिरभसाट् REGIE AAT गमने She
INDEX OF SUTRAS. ye
Text] Appendix CHAPTER IL A|1BICGID CD 27") णं एड एद् णावद् जणि मणु ATS ॥ |) 27 | 27 | 36 | 89 » 27 दाणिं एषं एत्ताहे एवहि ददानौमः॥ | — |— 37 | 40 » 27 | यया तथा श्रनयेः खाने जिम तिमौ ॥ || — |— | 88 | 4 28 TAT ईयः ॥ 28 |28 | 39 | 42 29 भावे AT: ॥ 29 |20 |40 [48 |
OD 294) ना डः ॥ || -- | -- | 41 | 44 |
CHAPTER III, |
1 | खट् ear लोप्यौ ॥ | ॥ शवलेभ्यो व्यजनं ॥ | 2 | 2 | 2| 2| | 8 ait ॥ | 3) 8 | 8| 3 4 ओ quire i | 4) 4) 4) 4 : aS AAT ॥ || 5| 5] 5 5 6 WTS च पंचमा वा॥ | 6 | 6 | 6 | 6 # 7 दोवेवा॥ | 7 7| 7) 7]. 7 | 8 षार्टः॥ | 8 | 8 | 8 | 8 | । 9 रेफः yam च ॥ | 9|9|9| 9 | 10 WAITS ॥ 10 | 10 |-- |- 11 प्रयमदितोययोर द्ितोयचतुैष॥ 11 | 11 10 | 10 | (07 11" ठतौयचठुधयोः प्रथमदितीयौ ॥ |-- |-- | 11 | 11 | 12 प्रथमसख wate ॥ 12 | 12 | 12 | 12 | 18 हा [^ Ba ] घधभानां ॥ 18 | 18 | 18 | 18 | 14 | 14 |14 |14 ।14
सस्य GST ॥
१ INDEX OF SUTRAS.
CHAPTER III. यस जः ॥ | पवयोर RT वा॥ Aa चरवौ ॥ qual यस तः ॥ जस्य रः ॥ रण्षाणां सः॥ दजथानां रनखाः.॥ गरदार्णं TUT ॥ मडदानां वलभाः ॥ । यवयोर् wae; | (CD पव ०व्य ०) रलयोर् यत्सासः ॥ , | श्दयोर् लोपे नणमानाम् wet हाऽप- `“ |. दादौ खितानां ॥ |
लोपे चलं कचिट् श्रलोपेऽपि ॥ | afar दितौीयचतुर्थयोः प्रथमह- तयौ ॥ स एव अन्येषां ॥ न पदादौ ॥ विट् aera श्रपि ॥ संयोागख दटस्रागमे मध्ये ॥ यवयोर् दर् उतौ.॥ खंख्यायास् तिश्योर् ata ` - -
*
INDEX OF SUTRAS. | ६९. Text CHAPTER III. | 88 तख a 84 (© 7) | कटतौययोः खरे ॥ (C 1) कगचजत- दपयवां प्रायो लुक्) | 85 0 7 | यलम् aati (OD य ० sath)
86 शष्ठिप्रयोगाद् वस्या ॥ 37| |न लोपोऽपभरंशेऽे रेफख ॥ 88| . | पैशाच्या. रणएयोर् लनौ ॥ 89| ` |मागधिकायां रसयोर् लशौ ॥
40 07 99| ्ौरसेन्यां तख दो वा ॥ |:
गोता AE BRIN म EPR RNR aT,
२ INDEX OF PRA/KRIT WORDS.
II. INDEX OF PRAKRIT WORDS —
OCCURRING IN THE FOREGOING PAGES,
कक
^ Numbers preceded by capital letters refer to the Appendices ; the others to
the Teat ; words enclosed within angular brackets, [ |, refer to the Footnotes.
Zl
ष्य(च) 0 7, iti, 84.
ष्यदूसरियं 7, 7.
GH ii, 3. 9. 27. 86. CD, iii, 84.
afar (nom. sg.) i, 3. अग्नि), 8. अण्गिणि (gen. sg.) i, 18. अग्स्म i, 18. [अग्गिर i, 14.] अग्मि i, 14. म्गौ (nom. pl.) i, 11. अग्गिणि (nom. pl.) i, 12. afar- fe i, 8. [अम्गोद्िता i, 8.] afag i
` शर्या iii, 9. 26
way ii, 9
च्छति ii, 1
BRT isi, 4.
ष्यव्नं C D, i, 1. afar D, ii, 14. warfcar ¢ 1), 1), 5. श्यनः 0 D, ii, 6. [व्यो iti, 9.]
` [खंतेखरः ii, 10.)
au O D, iii, 34.
4 “agar C D, ii, 20.
wat iii, 8, BOD, iii, 6. ष्य OD, 597
' , चवं iii, 9. ५ wad C D, ii, 24. Poe | we (nom. pl.) i, 8. ¢ D,i, 8. 24. 269.
ae ‘ace. pl.) B 07 i, 8. C D, i, 264. ` न्दरं 1, 8. 0 D,i, 7. खम्देद्िता i, 8 खन्दाद्ठितेा i, 29. we i, 81. अन्दाणं 0 D,
ॐ
i, 5. चऋ्दाद्ं 0 D,i, 5. सम्दस्मि CD, i,
814, egg i, 8. 0 D,i, 81". ष्यन्दारिसो ¢ 1), ii, 5. र ता 11, 11. 0 D, iii, 80, रदंताणं CD, [अरिर्दताणं C D, i, 5.] (i, 5 [अरुदताणं ¢ 7), i, 5.] ्लिउलद् ( 1, 11५. ५.४ ष्ये iii, 88. ne wat ¢ D, iii, 6. es अवद B, iii, 84. [अवक्षयं ए ¢ D, iii, 85.] ्वच्ज० O D, iii, 39.
व्यवयासा D, ii, 1५.
[अवद्यं BOD, iii, 35.) . ` TS wgad Ci, 114, ५६ wei, 3. 24. OD, i, 264, ii, 26, गखंद्ि० CD, iii, 39.
ST | [arearet iti, 11.] [arafcare CD, i, 5.] wrefcard C D, i, 5 चणा © D, iii, 19. grat ¢ D, iii, 6. aifad ili, 18. arafcart ¢ D, 17. 30. grat CD, iii, 6. | oes cure ii, 20. 0 D, ii, 20. व न्याल् C D, ii, 20, tag tg hla a
INDEX OF PRA’KRIT WORDS. a2
ड् | ड् OD, ii, 27% Tra 11, 4. x fied ii, 8. ili, 4 द्द CD, ii, 5. ogd CD, ii, 20. दत्य ¢ D, iii, 80. ear ii, 1. ra ii, 28, eget ¢ 7, ii, 20. ` cao OD. i, 1. og ii, 20. OD, ii, 20. gai, 1. 22. दसि ii, 5. qe ii, 1. 18. | इखच्छति ii, 1. ˆ दागतो ii, 1. क | : , दसरा i, 1. ई , दरं CD, ii, 11. उ । GAT iii, 8. wfag iii, 8. CD, iii, 3. WATS ii, 5. 3, 8. 29. SET ii, 9.
Se ii, 8. iii, 9. 28 0, iii, 5.
war ¢ D, iii, 34. उप्पल iii, 8. उम्दा BCD, iii, 28. ewa ( D, ii, 20. [उवज्ज्ाखाणं CD, i, 5.] उवज्ायाणं CO D, i, 5. उवरिज्ञा ¢ D, ii, 20. उसद्धा ¢ 7, ii, 5. iii, 84. ऊ | ऊढा ;1 1. र| ` एव्यारिसा ¢ 2, ii, 5. ` Wt ii, 12.
ef 0 D, ५, 275
waz ¢ 7), ii, 27%.
एत्थ Oi, 11.
एति i, 12.
ufaa C D, ii, 5.
एवं ii, 19, 24, 28.
vate OD, ii, 21.
wi OD, iii, 39.
va 7, 22.B OD, ii, 10. [शसा > 4. एतं
ii, 10.] at | [ar CD, ii, 14.] omy ii, 19. Brava 7, 28. व्यासरितं;, 28. Brgy ii, 8.
[दोरसिं ii, 23.)
Srefad ii, 28. क|
(क) को BOD, iii, 3. fa i, 28. [केण ii, 6.] कम्दा © D, iii, 28. काणं ii, 15. ard ii, 15.
aru (कवि) B, iii, 34.
aru (कपि) B, iii, 34,
कंखरवा ii, 9.
कल्ला, li, 9.
ase ii, 3.
BUI iii, 20. `
कणौरो ¢ 7, iii, 20.
aver BC D, iii, 28. कण्दं iti, 6.
कत्य ii, 4.
कंतप्पा ¢ 7, iii, 11.
कंट्मं 71, 9.
are i, 1.
कतुव्जोया ii, 2.
[कन्दे iii, 28.
कमलं [1, 1.] ii, 22. awa 0, ii, 11५.
कम्मं 7, 11. aarti, 5. ware i, 5.
कतरे ii, 10.
करद् BC D, iii, 8. [कुर C D, ii, 278]
कणर् 0 D, iii, 20, कतं }, 28. 27. =. =
६9
18. 26. कद् ili, 12. C D, iii, 39%. कयं 0, ii, 27. 0 7, ii, 26. iii, 30. ili, 895. aye ¢ 7, i, 26%. कातव्वं ii, 4. iii, 9. 29, afa ii, 19. we ii, 19, B CD, ii, 4. ATTY ii, 5. कासा (ii, 19.] 07 करि० 0), 114 (ii, 19, कल्ल ° ii, 89. कल्ला i, 25. कव्व ii, 8. ii, 2. BC D, iii, 27. Hazrat CD, ii, 20. [कसिणं iii, 30.] afusid ii, 25 काद् B, iii, 84, [© D, iii, 34.] ara B, iii, 84. © D, iii, 84. कारण B, काठं OD, iii, 115. [iii, 84. काया 111, 35. काला OD, iii, 84. काल CD, ii, 271, ara CD, ii, 18°. ` कावुरिसं B, iii, 84. arefcd ए, iii, 34. HTTAT iii, 29, arear ¢ D, iii, 12. , किरिवरं ८ 7, iii, 115. क्लेलद् 0 D, iii, 21. BLA iii, 8. : Haz C D, iii, 20. [aret ili, 28.] कुलं 3, 2. [कुला 1, 4.] कृले 3 ¢ 7, ‡, (mata BCD, i, 8.] कुलानि), FT i, 8 aan B, iii, 34. [Rar ii, 84.] B, ii, 84. gar ए, iii, 34. RET B, 1), 34. as CD,i,1 क्रूलु CD,;1,1 ` करस C D, ii, 5. , क्यं D, ii, 14 . ` rg ii, 84. [कोद्रला C D, iii, 84. |
| 7 ° कामद; 1 ~ . "काद्या iii, 28
कैरवा), u, 14 ककव D, ii, 14
INDEX OF PRA’KRIT WORDS.
ख | खम्गं iii, 3. खंभो iii, 10, 19. खमा iii, 4, खस्य O D. iii, 11४. खिव्नए CD, ili, 16. खिसा ili, 80. खु ii, 24. ¢ 7, ii, 24, खदा iil, 28, wT) wad D, ii, 1. गति ui, 17 गव्या ¢ D, ii, 34.B, iii, 34. गणएण B, 111, 34 गंगा i, 2. (nom. sg.) Wat i, 8. Ware i, 9 गंगा (ace. pl.) 3 © D, i, 8 गच्छति ii, 4. 10. [afwet ¢ 7 ii, 278] गदं ¢ D, ili, 89५. गयं C D, ili, 89५. wets C, i, 115. गणंति C, i, 11५. गष D, ii, 1°. war © D, iii, 84, ware ii, 21. `
गयणं ii, 21. गयणातेा ‡ 16. wWrarg i, 16.
गयणदिंतोा i, 16. wear (abl, ag.) i, 16. (गयाच i, 16 | |
weer OD, iti, 21.
weg ¢ 1), ii, 274,
गव्विरोा © 7, ii, 20.
emgage C D,i, 1
WAT ii, 1.
मामन्तर्णं li, 29.
arfaat ¢ D, ii, 20.
गानो (nom. sg.) ii, 1. गामच्यो ii, 1. गामे +, 14. © 7, 2, 1. 53 ¢ D, i, 8. areata i, 14. B OD, i, 8. wate i, 7. arent eat CD, i, 8. गामेद्दिताः, 8 |
mat (माद) ii, 16. गाकीच्यो [गाकौख गावी] ii, 16. माकौ arate watts गाकोश्िता गाकोषं ii, 16, गाकौसुं ii, 16. [arate ii, ` 16.]
Te भ
INDEX OF PRA’KRIT WORDS. ay
गिष्डति iii, 23.
farer ii, 22. ए © 7, iii, 28.
fafcur i, 12. [fatra i, 3.]
गुण i, 17. 25. 80. © 7, i, 254
[गरू 2, 3.] गरं i, 8, गुरूणा i, 8. C 7, i, 6%, गुरणा (gen. sg.) ti, 18. [ATT i, 14. गुरुमपि), 14. गुरू (nom, pl.) i, 11. ATS (nom. pl.) ii, 21. गुरूं 0 7, i, 7. [गुरुहिते i, 8.] C 0, i, 8. गृरूणं ¢ 7, 1, 5. WS C D, i, 5. गृरुवौ (nom. gg.) © D, iii, 80. axe C D, ii, 24.
Fras B, iii, 34.
ग्रामा 7), 37,
घ|
Wa ii, 5.
घर ii, 10. 19. 20.
घसि iii, 37.
a |
away 0 D, ii. 18.
azar [0 7, ii, 14.]
ae 0 7), iti, 34.
चचर- CD, 111, 114.
पत्तारो CD, i, 8. चत्तारि ¢ 7, i, 3. [6 D, ii, 14.] चचसे C D, i, 8. चण्डं C D, i, 6.
ष्वंदट्० ii, 89, [eds (nom. pl.) ii, 19.]
dau ii, 29.
ष्वं दुज्जला ii, 1.
ष्वन्द्रिकोज्जनसौय i, 1,
ष्वमरः 71, 22.
चचचरियाए C D, ti, 27४.
qe B, iii, 34.
ष्वा B, iii, 84. चारण B, iii, 84.
fast C 7, i, 1.
fagfa C D, i, 3.
विय i, 31. ii, 17. [21.] 0 7, i, 254.
razr 0 D, iii, 11%
[चसा ii, 15.]
चनो ii, 15.
ey ii, 17. : 9
Se COD, i, 1. चारो 07), iii, 34, °खा ii, 19.
| Fea ii, 17. 21.
[ag ii, 22.]
we iii, 3.
कच्छा ¢ D, iti, 11५.
कट iii, 26.
BUA iii, 3.
BAT ili, 8. 14.
fate C D, ii, 27°.
RE ¢ 7, ii, 27°.
ददि ¢ D, ii, 24.
ज | |
जं OD, ii, 11. ser iii, 23. [जस्सा BCD, i, 3. जिस्सा BC D, i, 3.] are 6, i, 11. [जेतिं), 3.]
जणा B, iii, 34.
जडा 111, 12.
जडो ii, 20.
sifeat ii, 20.
जणा ¢ D, iii, 80.
जेष (declined) [C 7, i 1.]
जेन्तं i, 6.
Sate 11, 24.
जनता iii, 15.
wat i, 1.
जया B CD, 111, 85.
wae ¢ 7), ii, 24, ose C D, iti, 84.
जलति i, 12.
जलदिणेा ii, 21.
estate CD, ili, 39.
जसा [i, 4.] ii, 22.
जद 0 7, i, 1.
जदा ii, 22.
जा (यावत्) [ii, 21.] 0 D, ii, 21.
जादि ii, 87.
जारिसौ C D, ii, 5.-
wre i, 1,
ठ |
ae INDEX OF PRA’KRIT WORDS.
लाव ii, 21. © D,i, 1. € D, ii, 21. fa ¢ 7, ii, 27°. [fafaee ii, 19.] faryo CD, ii, 18% ॐ, 12. fara (nom. 8.) ii, [10.] © 7, iti, 39. जिनस्स॒7), 18. farsi iii, 1. 21. 26. fara 0 D, ii, 274 far ili, 23. ara ¢ D, iu, 80. लुगे © D, iii, 39. जव्वणं 11, 15. & OD, ii, 27%. ar © 7, ii, 27%. जोाद्या CD, ii, 27. [arrest C D, ii, 14.] जायण० C D,i, 1. भ । मक्षरि° CD, i, 1. : z | waar © D, ili 11% °F ii, 19. efzarat iii, 38. 3 fart 7), 16. war ८ D, iii, 11. S| SST iii, 16. waea OD, ii, 27%. [Svat iti, 9.] | Gl [गला C D, ii, 278.] Tq | w [ii, 6. 21.] ©, i, 11. D, ii, 1. CD, i, 1. ; oy CD, i, 6%. wager ¢ D, iii, 84. WE ii, 17.
wed OD, i, 5. wee CD, i, 5. uefa CD, i, 8. wefe CD, i, 7.
शकर CD, iii, 11
wat © D, iii, 3.
wat O D, i, 5.
watactt ¢ D, iii, 34.
णयणा CD, ii, 12.
wet C D, i, 26°.
ware ¢ D, ili, 34.
waft ¢ D, ii, 279;
एवद् ¢ D, ii, 274.
एवि C, i, 11°.
wear CD, iii, 34.
fufaret C, ii, 27. © 7, ii, 26.
रणि (declined) [C D, i, 1.]
fue at ¢ D, iti, 34.
खिच्छरा CD, iii, 11.
[फिद्ए C D, ii, 278.)
faa © D, ii, 27%.
fufwe 0, ii, 27. © 7, ii, 26.
एनी 0 D, iii, 15°.
wat OD, iii, 15%. ,
west C D, iii, 84.
Weta OD, ii, 20.
त)
a (i, 19.] ii, 18. ©, ii, 27. © 7, + 19. लं 2, 8. qd (nom. sg.) i, 19, 28. 29. C 7, i, 19. तु [i, 19.] CD, i, 19. तुवं fi, 19.] © 7, i, 19. तुरं fi, 19.] CD, i, 19. तङ [0 7, ii, 278. at i, 8. ati, 8. तं (ace. sg.) [3, 20.] CD, i, 20. qa (ace. sg.) i, 20. C D, i, 20. ge (ace. sg.) i, 20.C 7, i, 20. ते (instr. sg.) i, 28. Gai, 28. axi, 28. avi, 28. gate (abl. sg.) i, 24. qmf wari, 24. तुमाते i, 24. तदन्ता i, 24, ते (gen. sg.) ए 0 D,i,8. तव BOD, i, 8. तुद i, 25. ii, 22. तुभं i, 25. ii, 22. तुम्द i, 25. afa BC D, i, 3. तयि BCD, i, 8. ax CD, i, 25°, gratia C D, i, 25>.
$
INDEX OF PRA’KRIT WORDS.
We (nom. pl.) i, 8. [21.] © 7, 7, da (nom. pl.) i, 21. तुन्दे (acc. pl.) B C D, i, 8. ga¥ (ace. pl.) i, 22. ii, 27, awfe 3, 8. OD, i, 7. qeafe ili, 17, वम्देदिंता), 8. 0 D, i, 24. तुम्हाणं i, 5. Gare i, 5. qe CD, i, 255 qeg i, 8. 0 D, i, 25. [gag i, 3.]
aii, 17. OD, ii, 11. 24. तेण CD, i, 26%, ad CD, ii, 18% Hei. 9. are i, 9. amet © D, iii, 28. तस्मा BC D, i, 8. तिसा BC D, i, 8. तस्मिं 5 ¢ D, i, 3. afe BOD,i, 8.0 D, iii, 23. aa BCD,i,3. तत BOD,i,3.4 i, 81. C, 2, 11५. OD, i. 25°. ताणं i, 5. ताद्दं 7, 5. तेसं 1,.8. afi, 8.
TR ili, 9.
तक्षरो BCD, iii, 24.
तडाकं C D, iii, 114,
तणवो © D, ili, 80.
तष्टा 111, 23.
तमातरे C 7, iii, 11.
agra O 7, iti, 21.
तपापररोद्धा 7, 1.
तद्द ¢}, i, 1.
[तद्दा 0 D, ii, 14.)
ता (तावत्) ii, 21. © D, i, 1. ii, 21,
तार्सि C D, ii, 5.
ताव ii, 21. C D, ii, 21. iii, 39%.
far ii,3. OD, iii, 6.
तिखि ¢ D, i, 10५. fe OD, i, 7. [तदि CD, i, 7. FeO D, i, 7.] Arar C D, i, 8. fawé CD, i, 6. arg 07), i, 8. तौर © D, i, 8.
fave (तच्छं) BC D, iii, 6.
fame 0 7, ii, 184.
तिव्यगरा 77), 12.
तिस CD, ii, 271,
तियसीसे(), 1. |
°तिसिच्याए ¢ D, ii, 24.
तोषा CD, ii, 15. BC D, ii, 4, कौ सपं, 6,
<9
lequarw ii, 19.] qat C D, i, 1.
तुर्हारिसा 7, ii, 5.
[तलिच्जंति ii, 21.7 ,.
cay ii, [5.] 19,
[avira CD, ii, 14.] deter CD, iii, 31. ALT iii, 22. 81. aa ii, 6. [iii, 25.) aatat ¢ D, iii, 81. तेग्ृण० ¢ 7, ii, 24. emt 11, 19.
oF ii, 19.
4
a] रंभा iii, 11. थौ 07, iii, 9. wy C D, ii, 274,
ql
` टञ्भते iii, 1.
दङबड़ 0 D, ii, 278.
दद्धो 1, 16.
दम्भा ili, 9.
eau 0 D, ii, 271
दह ili, 14,
ददि), 8. ददि), 8. afeuri, 3.0 D,i, 6५. दिदि i, 3. |
दाढा iii, 11.
दाणि 47), ii, 27.
दार ii, 7.
ara C 7, iii, 398,
fete ii, 10.
दौसते ii, 5. दिन्नः, [19.] 28. feg i, 27. [ii, 10.]
Siz iti, 29. [Sher © D, ii, 278.]
“SAM 1, 24.
SHU iii, 9. BO D, iii, 27. -
Se ili, 11. ge आ, 38. zr C D, ili, 3.
Se ii, 15. iii, 3.
दूर C, i, 114.
देया B, iii, 84. © D, iti, 34, Sari, 2. 8, 19, ॐ 10. देवं 18, Faq i,3.0
६८ INDEX OF PRA KRIT WORDS.
D,i,6% [सेवा (abl. sg.) BCD, i, 8.] Faq i, 13. [देवे (loc. sg.) i, 15. BOD,i,3. zata i, 15. BCD, i, 8.1] Zar (nom. pl.) BCD, iii, 35. देवा i,3. [11.] ii, 12. देवाणि i, 4. [Taare or Bare i, 4.] SF (ace. pl.) i, 15. gafe i, 7. © 7, ii, 15. देवें CD, i, 15. देवेहि © D, ii, 15. [दग FEAT i, 8.] Farsi, 5. SaTT i, 8. 5. देवेसु}, 3.
Size ii, 1. दविदा ii, 2.
zar C, ii, 27. © D, ti, 26.
दा OD, i, 10%. दुख CD, i, 10°. =a OD, i, 10%. दादि ५ 7, i, 7. [Rife C D,i,7. ef CD, i, 7-] arfeat C D, i, 3. erwe ¢ D, 1, 6. दासु or दषु ¢ 7, 1, 3.
दासा}, 31.
ध।
. धसा CD, ii, 20. , , चघणएवन्ता ¢ 7, 7, 20..
घसं iti, 16. [8 0 D, iii, 27.]
धनदा ii, 2.
“aq BCD, ii, 27.
Wat ili, 9.
धारेदि ii, 21.
fag C D, i, 24.
[धरेद्दि ii, 21.)
Gq i, 8. Fat i, 3. WAT, 4. घन् | pl) i, 10. wast i, 10. Bas i, 10. Byfeat CD, i, 8. wafsat i, 8. Haw i, 3.
a |
न ii, 21. iii, 25.
ae i, 8. 12. iii, 34. B, ili, 84. AR i, 8. नदर i, 9. AE (nom. pl.) i, 10. नद्या i, 10. ii, 1, नदे i, 10. ARES 1, 3. i, 15. aefeari, 8. wet i, 8. नद}, 8.
ware 111, 25.
azt BC D, iti, 27. ae ili, 16. [oafage © 7, ili, 89. "नमिल्ल० 0 D, ili, 89. wat ii, 18. नयन० BCD, ii, 4. wTATAG 11, 29. मद्दं 2, 11. ara ili, 6, नानं ili, 19. armt i, 24. arar iti, 11. नाया 111, 85. ofa ili, 39. निक्वंते i, 24. fans iii, 9. fad i, 1. ii, 16. निच्छये iii, 11. निन्हवियं B, iti, 28. निन्दविया B, iii, 23. निसामेथ ii, 26. नौोवारिखड BC D, ii, 4. Fraraarar ii, 1. Hye ii, 4. नखरं (ili, 84.] B, Hi, 84. awa ii, 27. art BC D, i,3.
q agua B, iii, 34. पद्क्रूल्ता iii, 34. qeur B, 27, 34. पदु B, 111, 34. quit B, iii, 34. qui B, iti, 84. परिस C D, ii, 9. परेण B, iii, 84. °परे © D, i, 1. पक्वाल दुः ¢ D, iii, 89. पच्छं iil, 16, 26. dare i, 6. पलुत्तं C D, iu, 34. WSTAT iti, 3. (ufesar ¢ D, 111, 34.]
_eufear ¢ 7, iii, 12.
वि क क eee
व Ree क
५ ¢
INDEX OF PRA’KRIT WORDS.
afswae CD, i, 1. afefag iii, 12. year C D, iii, 9. पद्मा CD, iii, 9. TAG 113, 33. पणवेधिण ¢ 7, ii, 19. न्पणाम ¢ D, i, 26%. [awe iii, 6.1
पत्ते iii, 3. BO, iii, 5. war iii, 26.
quart ¢ D, 11, 11. TSA iii, 80, yafae iii, 38. पनमत iii, 38.
पन्ना 111, 82.
WET iii, 23.
पयद् BC D, iii, 8 gaara ¢ D, 1. 24. पयाग० 0 10, iii, 84. पर्दा 0 0, iii, 34. पलक्वो ii, 30.
quia i, 23. [wa 1, 28. पलवितं i, 24.)
Umar 111, 22.
[ward iii, 22.)
पव्या iii, 9.
पव्वते ili, 9.
qa ii, 89.
ogg ¢ D,i, 1. wetsig © D, ii, 18%. aw i, 12. [परति i, 12.] पाडञ्ा ए, iii, 34. न्पाणं © D, ii, 24. grawa BC D, ili, 35. पाया ii, 12.
ara [ili, 22.] © D, iii, 12, 22,
पाद्ाणा iii, 14.
fi ii, 4.10.18. 21. fear B C D, iii, 35. पियद् BC D, iii, 35. पिव ii, 22. 0 D, ii, 27,
firataty ili, 12.
ae
faarat B, iii, 84. © D, iti, 84. पिसारण B, iii, 84. पिसाया BO D, ili, 85. Gre i, 8. [पौदयो (nom. se.) i, 8.1] we
(ace, sg.) i, 8. (agi, 8.1 सौलणं ii, 24. az (खष्ट) , 1. as (=ue) iii, 8. © D, iii, 8. पटमा CD, in, 9. qeat ¢ D, 1, 9 पणर 7, 10 quant ¢ D, ii, 20. gat BCD, i, 3 पथवौ 11) qu 111, 26 परिमा C D, iii, 154 परिल C D, ii, 20 oufaary C D, i, afew ¢ D, ili, 89 at ¢ 7, 71, 15४. quart C D, iii, 80. पच्छ 07, i, 8. i, 26°, 3, 269. ofa ii, 19. [गपि ii, 19.]
mw |
फडासे ii, 20.
-फडिक्षो i, 20. फणा ii, 22. फर्सं ii, 11. owe B, ili, 84. fast ¢ D, ii, 21, Ge ili, 8. 29. ag 0 D, ii, 8,
ब | azat © D, iii, 380. त्विव ¢ i,
afa i, 8. 7, 1. 10. बि}, 8. बद्धौए },
ii, 4. बद्धौ (nom. pl) i, 10, बदा), `
10, ii, 1. बद्धो ; 10, बदिद्दिं8.
go
afef¥ar i, 8. gah, 3. OD, i, FETS 0 D, i, 5. बुद्धिषु, 8. बुद्धिदा), 1, बुदोरा ii, 1. बोकर ¢ 7, i, 1.
भ
भद्एो 0 7), iti, 20.
WATT iii, 8. 11.
भगे ii, 15.
भणामि i, 20. 22. ii, 26. OD, ii, 26. ii, 27. भणमा ii, 27. 0, ii, 27, ww O, ii, 27. [भणिया © D, ii, 14.)
ware CD, i, 1.
भदा iii, 28.
watt 0 D, iii, 9.
‘waz CD, ii, 5.
wame 0 1), ii, 5. .
भयस्स॒द्रं CD, ii, 5.
भरा ¢ D, iii, 12.
" 0 afer 04, 11५.
भवरो 0 7,.4,9. भवारिसो 07, ii, $.
भविष्यो ¢ D, iii, 30.
भसले,0 7, iii, 9.
भातु C D, i, 1.
भाति ii, 22.
भिच्प्पद् ¢ D, ii, 5.
भिच्यप्फद ¢ D, ii, 5.
frase CD, ii, 5.
भिक्खा iti, 14. 86.
भिज्ज॑तं ii, 25.
wat BCD, iii, 85.
waug CD, ii, 5.
wag 0 7), ii, 5.
wawe 0 D, ii, 5.
[भुचा ii, 19.)
मत्तं, 8.] 8 0 D, iti, 27,
भ ii, 26. 27. 0, ii, 27. CD, ii, 26, 27. wz CO D,i, 1.
INDEX OF PRA*KRIT WORDS.
` &
WIEST ili, 84. ए, iii, 34. भाज्नं ¢ D, ii, 24. ra ii, 19. ii ५ TH ii, 19 reg ii, 19. eae
q | [at C D, ii, 278. ] ati, 3. मं 07, i, 260, मे (instr. sg.) i, 27. aw i, 27, acm i, 28. मे (gon. sg.) BO 7, i,3,0 D, ii, 18. सम BOD, i, 8.07, ii, 39 मज i, [28. ] 80. [ti, 6.] मड), 80. मयि BO D, i,8.4&B, iii, 84. CD, i, 814, मति ii, 17. eo मद्रा B, iii, 94, a मणं ¢ D, ii, 9. AAT [7), 1.] B, iii, 34, war B, iii, 84. CD, ill, 84. ew B, ili, i सक्णा 0 D, iii, 1 [34. , ABT ili, 4. Ws i, 23, संजया ii, 15. wz? O D, iii, 114, eww ¢ D, ii, 20. (afar i, 21.) ` awe? ¢ D, i, 26°. (माणस्सा i, 21. ] सतनो C D, iii, 11५. oun CD, ii, 20. मत्ता i, 1. [C D, i, 1. (declined)] सथुरं CD, iii, 11४. । wear OD, iii, 30. °मंदाल० ¢ D, iii, 39, WATT 171, 11. मनुसमा (nom. pl.) i, 21. wer (aco. pl.) wafa C,i, 113, [i, 22. ससानं 7, 23, म (मख) ii, 1. सरति C i, 11५. मद्वा ili, 18. as i, 8. asi, 3. मङ्णा [i, 3.] O D. i, 6“. were i, 3. महणं ¢ 7, }, 5, ame nee % CD, i, 5, a
INDEX OF PRA/KRIT WORDS.
[at O D, ii, 278.] .
oat ¢ 7), ii, 20.
माणद्न्ता C D, ii, 20.
[are ¢ D, ui, 275. |]
माया BC 7, iii, 85.
माला (nom. pl.) i, 10. माला i, 10. सा- wre i, 10, arate i, 8. [मालासु i, 8. |]
atafaar € 7, iii, 12.
faa © 7, ii, 27;.
Haar ili, 9.
सृजते, 1. ।
afwe i, 18. सुणि (gen. sg.) i, 18. afiyar (ace. pl.) i, 12.
सेद् CD, it, 271.
[av iii. 8.]
ona ¢ 7, ii, 24.
wv ii, 22. iii, [11.] 18. BCD, ii, 4. oud ¢ D, iti, 21.
{मूलवसा ¢ D, ii, 14. |
war C D, iii, 11५. .
an O D, iii, 89.
मेरा iii, 18.
मारो), 1.
ars C D, ii, 27.
य|
[य (=) ii, 21. OD, ii, 14.]
ग्यर० (कर vay) O D,i, 1.
°यरा (करा maker) C D, ii, 13%
र| र CD, ii, 274. एण B 111, 84. रक्वतु 2,8. रक्लंतु i, 4. रक्ल् BCD, 1, 8. Tw iii, 3. [cust C D, ii, 278. Tay iii, 30. Te iii, 84. राचा CD, 11, 113.
राणा C D, iii, 19.
fui, 5,
७९.
रिपु) 8. [fg i, 8.] fratyi, 8. रिकं B, iti, 34.
रिसद्दा C D, ii, 5.
रक्सो iii, 22.
aw CD, iii, 16.
रूपं i, 18.17. ° रूपे (nom. sg.) ii, 10.
लं |
लवणा iii, 6.
OMRTAT 111, 38,
wer iii, 6. 36.
लटभा ¢ D, iii, 174.
wat CO D, iii, 17°.
az OD, ii, 271. wefaw ¢ D, ii, 271,
wene CD, iii,39.
ompye ¢ D, ii, 24. aeatC D, iii, 30,
wefas (दधित) i, 1.
owlfaae CD, iii, 89.
fasifa (स्लोयंते) ii, 21.
arse B 0 7, iii, 35. लाए ¢ D, i, 5.
व| व ii, 22. 0 7, ii, 27, [वद् (वै) ii, 7.]
"वति (ठति) B C 7, ii, 10.
वद्र (वेर) ii, 7.
[at (aa) iti, 30.]
agar (व्याघ्रः) ¢ D, iii, 11.
[वक्लो (चः) 771, 4.)
[ant ili, 8.] oa D, iii, 1५.
aaa iti, 24.
वच्छ ili, 4.
वज्ज (व्रज) ¢ 7, 1, 1.
asa (वद्धं) iii, 9.
[वज्जरा ii, 15. ]
ASAT ii, 20.
वंमा iii, 16.
aaa ¢ 7, 1, 1.
agarar ¢ D, iii, 16.
वराद [ili, 34] B, iii, 84, वराद“ ए iii, 84.
os
वणराया BC D, iii, 85. [ower © D, ii, 14.) eqat C D, ii, 20, aq iii, 9. odfat ii, 1. वदिन्त ii, 19. dfear ii, 19. afear ii, 19. tes (ii, 19.] C D, ii, 19. d& farm © D, ii, 19. वदमान ili, 26." वन्दि iii, 23, वंभणोा ii, 10. व॑भणा 7), 12. 15. वंभणे (ace, pl.) i, 15. [ar ili, 3.] वम्दा ili, 3. amar iii, 8. 21. वयं i, 3. न्वये ¢ D,i, 1. aq ii, 87. eset 0 D, ii, 134 afd ili, 30. Fan CD, iii, 21. न्व 0 D, iii, 89. वसद्धौ 0 D, iii, 12. वसद्ा iii, 18. C D, ii, 5. वद्द्पदर CD, ii, 5. awe ¢ 1), ii, 5. aewe CD, ii, 5. विनी © 7, iii, 20. az (वधू) i, 3.1, 10. ae i, 9. वाला B, ii, 84. वा B, iii, 84. वारण B, iti, 34. वाञ्च iii, 37. वार ili, 7. [वस्वि C D, ii, 278] aifesra 11, 25. fa [ii, 6. 19.17, ii, 1%. CD, i, 1. CD, foftr ii, 19.] fii, 18%, ofaafaze ¢ 7), iii, 39. fasraat ¢ D, ii, 20. fateraii, 21. विचा ii, 15.
INDEX OF PRA/KRIT WORDS.
[विंजणङ © D, ii, 14]
faear iii, 16.
विच्लृणे i, 4,
fase iii, 11.
विष्ट C D, ili, 12. विदली € D, iii, 12.
विद्धा (ee) ¢ D, i, 26५.
विद्धं (विधु) iil, 5.
विष्पश्याचयेा B, ii, 84. विप्पजैरा CD, iii, 84.
विन्ममे ili, 9.
विन्भल्लो iii, 1.
faq ii, 22, fea ¢ D, ii, 271.
fae iii, 2. त
विव ii, 22, OD, ॐ, ‰7\.
विसेसे iii, 80.
fazat ¢ D, iti, 12.
fazuz C D, 7, 5.
fae ¢ D, ii, 5.
विदस्सदरं ¢ 7, ii, 5.
faara © D, ii, 278.
ofaga BCD, ii, 4.
Safar (ii, 10.] CD, iii, 39. ५
Fat iii, 82. 0 7, 3, 15, BCD, ii, 4. [कौसण्दं i, 6.]
Bill, 12. वुच्छं BOD, ii, 4.
बुद्धो ii, 5. iti, 26. © 7, iii, 16.
awue C D, ii, 5.
वुष्दष्फडं ¢ 7, ii, 5.
बुदस्सद ¢ D, ii, 5.
चे 010, i, 10°. fafa ¢ 1), i, 10%. वेदि © D, i, 7. [वदि CD, i, 7. वेदिं C 7, i, .] वेदिता 0 7, 1, 8. ave C D, i, 6. वेसु, C 1), i, 8. वेसु C 7,3.38.
WE ii, 5.
वेतङ्ो ii, 6.
Fafear isi, 22. 80.
(oafan ii, 19.]
वेनि iii, 8. C D, ii, 6, BC D, ii, 4.
av ii, 6.
afcasr D, ii, 1%
Agar iii, 29.
INDEX OF PRAKRIT WORDS. oF
सयं iti, 2.
[सरा C D, ii, 14.]
सरिनच्छा 0 D, ii, 5.
सरिताणं i, 5. ii, 11; efcarwi, 5. afceat C D, ii, 5.
-afcaat O D, ii, 5.
सरिसपो iii, 80.
aBC Di, 3. arate C DY, ii, 17*. वासरानि C D, ii, 17. स्व ii, 22. OD, ii, 271. श्र | waa CD, ili, 39.
a, efscae 0 D, iii, 39. ` सुरिमेा C D, ii, 5. ones 0 D, iii, 89. we iii, 2. WH 11), 39, सवरा OD, iti, 15. | । स, सवद्दा € D, iti, 84. न चच (nom. ag.) Hi, 1. 10.17. चा ii, 1. चा | SORT HF
age CD, i, 5. [wed (nom. pl.) ii, 19.] wate ¢ D, ii, 24.
सव्व ¢ D, 177;
ससौ 17)
ससं 1,.2. B © D, iti, 27
euey CD, i, 5
geet (1 D, ti, 29°.
संदणएणं ( D, ii, 29%
सायर ii, 22,
[सारया B © D, iii, 35.]
सावा ¢ D, 111, 34
atfesid ii, 25. सादिज्नमानं A, ii, 25, aifeuid A, ii, 25 (^
CD, i, 26%. से (gen.) i, 17 aur B, iti, 84 ` सरा ii, सु्द्ं CD, ii, 9. waa ii, 15. garer © D, ii, 15. BRITT ii, 1, सक्तो iii, 5. BC D, iii, 24. संखा ii, 22, सगणं iti, 2.9. B CD, iii, 27. संगिष्दद् BCD, ii, 4 ait ii, 15. deed ( 1), ii, 29%. ay ili, 27. fa (असि) 7, 18. । सच्निच्जद्र् ¢ D, i, 1. fay [8, ili, 34.] ¢ 7, iii, 34.
|
Waray iii, 26. faararat C D, iii, 80.
gat C D, iii, 11. सिग्धो ii, 3. iii, 9
सन्तमौसा (C D, ii, 14.] सत्तवोसं ¢ D, i, 1. fra iii, 5.
सन्त् ili, 9. सिदद्ितेा i, 8. सिद्धाणं ¢ D, i, 5. सन्ता ili, 8. faaat iii, 2. get CD, i, 1. सिभिणे € D, iti, 15.
सद्धासा ¢ 7, ii, 20. faa C D, iii, 30.
war iii, 9. 8 © D, iii, 27. fatu OD, i, 6. fata ii, 11. fete Bera ii, $. - CD, ti, 11.
gary OD, ii, 189. fad C D, iii, 80.
समरो CD, iti, 15%. | fafaar © D, ii, 15%.
afag ii, 15. सिद्द), 18.
aa 0 D, ii, 11. सलं), 25. 30.
10
og INDEX-OF PRA ’KRIT WORDs. .
Zt
, ससं, 11. ॐ, 18. सोसो is, 29, ` Seq ii, 22. es Oe 4. | , | Grave ii, 8. | , Bet B, ii, 84, ` .. । सामा), 1. oe thay ` सद B, iii, 84 क a aay 7), 21, _ A a i , सकुसुमं ¢ 7, iii, 84. ` [सोद ii, 8.] | ib. $4. ` पक्वं ii, 5, 26 । Brea CD, ii, 12. BTU, 8. iii, 9. 15. Shear C D, ii, 20. Ser OD, ii, 3, । aret i, 18.
। दए CD, ii, 26. Ger ii, 19. सुकर ¢ D सरिद D, ii, 14. 41, wa ii, 2.9. we OD, iii, 89 7
: सुखं 0 7), iti, 39%. Sraaq iii, 2 07), i, 26१. + ध ae 1 Ce, 2, = | इछ ५ 7, 3, 26, , ` ५ 1 . SB OD, ii, 27 ` | ङ्कारो D, ii, 14. oes . 0) वशं iil, 9 ' { दणुमत्ते OD, 7, 20. ` त :: षवे अः) OD, ii, 80. । war OD, ii, 20. 1 . वे (से) OD, iii, 80. war ii, 12. ee gu BCD,i, 8. सुद्ेण 0 D, i, 1. [रिणा i, 3.] fae सुदश्या i, 24. ष्टवति iii, 89. दाति iii, 81, re 0 D, i, [awe iii, 30.] 1. OD, ii, 278, वेद् 0 7, ii, 24. ` .. सुखम iii, 80. CR iii, 89. ` खरि ii, 80. 36, । स्मो iii, 9. GUT i, 1. 24. 28. 29. fi, 18. ¢ 7, ii, 26. [ Frere iii, 11.] wu i, 21. 0D, i, 26. Pear ii, are ii, 6. fee 07, iii, 30, ` ` TST 11; 21, चेदिह C D, ii, 20. CORRIGENDA ET ADDENDA. af Page 14, line 1], read ats for बद . , ” 29, ”? 6, 3) वन्दि 3) wet » 41, » 8, » तुवं » a 93 47, 39 1, 93 fate 33 fax
On page 9 in footnote (रद) insert: B wae, and on page 53, in footnote (u) insert: CD prefix देवात् दवा, and in footnote (¢) insert: 0 D prefix
~~ OS
` wa eat ॥
४.५ a # नि we a 1 ५ 0 co
९ ५ १ ५ ; । ; ts ” । ae, र (ए ४ a! १८ : ¥ 9 yy (9. ^ “ : ५ va
‘(4 book that te shut is but a block”
९ GOVT. OF INDIA. „ & Department of Archaeology ए NEW. DELHI. .
dhs Se, ta FE ५
ean and - moving.
SyBy MMB NeBER ` ` ,: १ ee
९ ॥ ORDER BOOK Cox |:
Ms Ther ¦ | Ahmedabad 6 |,